FCC ID: B944965AGN Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN

 

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

 

 

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

 

 

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

 

 

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

 

 

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition: June 2007 First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-005 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................... 2 Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ........................................................................................................................ 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules ......................... 3 Brazilian notice ........................................................................................................................ 4 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 4 Canadian notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ......................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ............................................................................................................ 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................ 6 France ...................................................................................................... 6 Italy .......................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................... 6 Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules ............................................................ 7 Ergonomics notice ..................................................................................................... 7 Germany .................................................................................................. 7 Indian notice ........................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ...................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 8 Bluetooth devices .................................................................................................... 10 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ................................................................ 10 Korean notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Singaporean wireless notice .................................................................................................... 11 Taiwan notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................ 11 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ..................................................................................................... 12 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ...................................................................................................................... 13 Telecommunications device approvals ....................................................................... 13 U.S. modem statements ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem declarations ......................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements .................................................................................... 21 Japanese modem statements ..................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements .............................................................................. 22 Voice support .......................................................................................... 22 Power cord notice .................................................................................................................. 23 Japanese power cord notice ..................................................................................... 23 Macrovision Corporation notice ............................................................................................... 23 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice ........................................................................................... 24 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ............................................................................... 24 Power cord notices ................................................................................................................. 25 Travel notice .......................................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner .................................. 25 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal ..................................................................................................................... 26 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ................................................................................ 26 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 26 Chinese material content declarations ....................................................................................... 27 Japanese material content declaration ...................................................................................... 29 United States mercury disposal ................................................................................................ 29 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ...................................................................... 29 Index ................................................................................................................................. 30 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device may not cause harmful interference. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-

GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Italy L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz

(Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Broadband Wireless Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The SAR information for your computer, including the recommended minimum distance from the body, is available on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennae are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/

kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG has the certification mark below:

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENWW Korean notice 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENERGY STAR compliance Computers bearing the ENERGY STAR logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for Notebook computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING!

always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/

laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ENWW Power cord notice 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING!

To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Battery notices To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery; short WARNING!

the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notices WARNING!

To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Travel notice WARNING!

power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION:

distribution system. To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable ENWW Power cord notices 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalen t Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel X X X X X X X X X X X Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking decice Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB flash memory driveUSB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation "Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment."

NOTE:

conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. ENWW Japanese material content declaration 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 11 B battery disposal notice 26 battery notice 11, 24 Brazilian notice 4 C cable grounding notice 25 Canadian modem statement 21 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 27 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 26 equipment 26 mercury 29 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 26 ENERGY STAR compliance 12 environmental notices 26 equipment disposal notice 26 ergonomics notice 7 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 New Zealand 22 U.S. 14 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 7 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 29 Japanese modem statement 21 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 23 K Korean notice 11 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice 23 mercury disposal notice 29 modem notices 13 modem statements Canadian 21 Japanese 21 N New Zealand modem statement 22 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 24, 26 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 26 equipment disposal 26 ergonomics 7 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 24 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 23 Korean 11 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 23 mercury disposal 29 modem 13 perchlorate material 29 power cords 23, 25 Singaporean 11 Taiwan 11 travel 25 P power cord notice 23, 25 S Singaporean wireless notice 11 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 11 travel notice 25 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 14 V voice support 22 W wireless LAN devices 3 ENWW Index 31 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

HP Notebook PC Getting Started Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-

Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2007 Document Part Number: 443826-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. iii iv Product notice Table of contents 1 First-time setup Identifying hardware for setup ................................................................. 1 Setting up the computer .......................................................................... 2 Step 1: Insert the battery ......................................................... 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power ....................... 4 Step 3: Open the computer ..................................................... 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer .................................................. 6 Step 5: Set up the software ..................................................... 6 Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) ........................... 7 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware ......................................................................... 9 Top components .................................................................... 9 Lights ................................................................... 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices ................. 10 Display components ............................................ 11 Keys .................................................................. 12 Front components ................................................................ 13 Rear components ................................................................. 14 Right-side components .......................................................... 15 Left-side components ............................................................ 16 Bottom components .............................................................. 17 Wireless antennae ............................................................... 18 3 Finding information Finding Help and Support ..................................................................... 19 Finding the user guides ......................................................................... 19 Identifying installed software and hardware ............................................ 20 4 Next steps Protecting the computer ......................................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from viruses ...................................... 21 Protecting your system files ................................................... 21 Protecting your privacy ......................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from power surges ............................. 22 Using the computer safely ..................................................... 22 Connecting to a computer network ......................................................... 24 Installing additional hardware and software ............................................ 25 Installing hardware .............................................................. 25 Locating and installing software ............................................. 25 Updating the software installed on the computer ...................................... 26 Turning off the computer ....................................................................... 26 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources ..................................................................... 27 v Quick troubleshooting ........................................................................... 28 The computer is unable to start up ......................................... 28 The computer screen is blank ................................................ 29 Software is functioning abnormally ........................................ 29 The computer is turned on but not responding ......................... 30 The computer is unusually warm ............................................ 31 An external device is not working .......................................... 31 The wireless network connection is not working ....................... 32 Contacting technical support ................................................................. 33 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ........................................................................ 35 Backing up your information .................................................................. 36 When to back up ................................................................ 36 Backup suggestions ............................................................. 37 Backing up specific files or folders ......................................... 38 Backing up the entire hard drive ............................................ 38 Creating recovery points ...................................................... 39 Scheduling backups ............................................................. 39 Performing a recovery ........................................................................... 40 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs ......................... 40 Performing a recovery from the hard drive .............................. 40 Initiating a recovery in Windows .......................... 40 Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition ............................................................. 41 Appendix B Operating environment and input power Operating environment ......................................................................... 43 Input power ......................................................................................... 44 Appendix C Routine care Cleaning the display ............................................................................ 45 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................... 45 Traveling and shipping ......................................................................... 45 Index .................................................................................................... 47 vi First-time setup 1 Identifying hardware for setup To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. NOTE: Components included with the computer may vary by region or country and by model. Component

(1)

(2) Power cord AC adapter Component

(3)

(4) Primary battery Modem cable (select models only) NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. NOTE: A modem cable is required only for dial-up networking. Identifying hardware for setup 1 Setting up the computer CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. 2. Connecting the computer to external power Inserting the battery into the computer The battery begins to charge. NOTE:

3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) NOTE: Refer to Appendix A, "Backup and recovery," for instructions. 2 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Align the tabs (1) on the battery with the notches on the battery bay. 3. Press the battery (2) into the battery bay until the battery clicks into place. Setting up the computer 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power NOTE: Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. NOTE: A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but the battery charge display will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. 4 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 3: Open the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch (1) to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display (2). Setting up the computer 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer To turn on the computer:

Slide the power switch to the right (1). The power light (2) turns on. Step 5: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. If you are prompted to select an operating system language, CAUTION:

choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software NOTE:

setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. 6 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) You can use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs containing your full factory image. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix A, Backup and Recovery, for detailed instructions. Setting up the computer 7 8 Chapter 1 First-time setup 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Top components Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Power light Battery light Drive light Caps lock light Component

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Num lock light Identifying the hardware 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Pointing stick Presentation button Volume mute button

(5)

(6)

(7) Volume scroll zone Right pointing stick button Left pointing stick button 10 Chapter 2 Quick tour Display components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Integrated camera (select models only) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch (select models only) Keyboard light Keyboard light button

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) HP Fingerprint Sensor (fingerprint reader) Internal microphones (2) Convertible hinge Ambient light sensor Identifying the hardware 11 Keys Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) esc key fn key Windows logo key

(4)

(5)

(6) Windows applications key Embedded numeric keypad keys Function keys 12 Chapter 2 Quick tour Front components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch Keyboard light button External WWAN antenna button

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) External WWAN antenna Power switch Display release latch Bluetooth compartment Identifying the hardware 13 Rear components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Windows security button*

RJ-11 (modem) jack RJ-45 (network) jack

(4)

(5) External monitor port Power connector

*This button is used to enter the ctrl+alt+delete command. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl

+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. 14 Chapter 2 Quick tour Right-side components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Fingerprint reader 1394 port Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack

(5)

(6)

(7) Media Card Reader USB port Security cable slot Identifying the hardware 15 Left-side components NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent ExpressCard slot (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent Smart card reader (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port 16 Chapter 2 Quick tour Bottom components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Battery bay Speaker SIM slot Vents (2)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Docking connector Charge level indicator Battery release latch Accessory battery connector Hard drive compartment

(10) Accessory battery connector door Identifying the hardware 17 Wireless antennae On select computer models, wireless antennae send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. Component Component

(1)

(2) WWAN antenna*

WLAN antennae (2)*

(3) External WWAN antenna

*Antennae (1) and (2) are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the NOTE:

antennae free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 18 Chapter 2 Quick tour Finding information 3 Finding Help and Support NOTE: Help and Support is preinstalled on the computer. Access to Help and Support does not require an Internet connection. You can access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. In addition to providing information about the Windows operating system, Help and Support includes these topics:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications How to help safeguard the computer How to get the best performance from the battery How to set up a wireless network Links to community forums of IT experts Finding the user guides User guides and regulatory and safety information are provided on the computer and are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. NOTE: User guides for select models may also be provided on a User Guides disc. Finding Help and Support 19 Identifying installed software and hardware To see a list of the software that is preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

Select Start > All Programs. NOTE: Double-click the name of a program if you want to open it. For details about using software included with the computer, refer NOTE:

to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. You can also use Device Manager to add hardware or modify device configurations. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help for more information. In the left pane, click Device Manager. 20 Chapter 3 Finding information 4 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how to protect the computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. To access Norton Internet Security or get more information about it, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Protecting your system files The operating system and the backup and recovery software provide several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. For additional information, refer to Appendix A, Backup and recovery. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. Protecting the computer 21 To optimize the computers privacy protection features, follow these guidelines:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are commonly available from computer or electronics retailers in many regions. Using the computer safely To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your WARNING!

equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 22 Chapter 4 Next steps To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort WARNING!

Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this document, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or WARNING!

battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. Protecting the computer 23 Connecting to a computer network Bluetooth Local area network (LAN) The computer has the following networking capabilities:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. NOTE:

wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with the computer. You can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a 24 Chapter 4 Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Installing hardware To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software Software on the computer is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled software. To see a list of ready-to-use programs or to start a program, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs. A list of programs is displayed. 2. Click the name of a program to start the program. Preloaded software. This software cannot be used until it is installed. To locate and install a preloaded program or driver, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Software Setup. A list of programs and drivers is displayed. 2. Click the program or driver you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Software on disc. To install software from a disc, follow these steps:

1. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen Insert the disc into your optical drive. instructions. NOTE: Restart the computer if you are prompted to do so. For details about using the software provided with the computer, NOTE:

refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, in the software Help, or on the manufacturers Web site. Installing additional hardware and software 25 Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software installed on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access links for updating installed software, refer to Help and Support. Turning off the computer Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 26 Chapter 4 Next steps 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Access Web site links and additional information about the computer Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools, like Help and Support, can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. For further assistance, connect to the Internet and contact technical support by selecting Start > Help and Support > Contact support. Troubleshooting resources 27 Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you slide the power switch, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with this computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided, until startup occurs:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 28 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank but you have not turned off the computer, one or more of these settings may be the cause:

The computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly slide the power switch to the right. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external displays, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 4. Quick troubleshooting 29 The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 30 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer is unusually warm To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE:

components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during operation. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal An external device is not working If an external device does not function as expected, confirm these settings:

The device is turned on as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with the operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, refer to Help and Support. Quick troubleshooting 31 The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

NOTE:

administrator. If you are connecting to a corporate network, contact the IT Be sure that the wireless device is turned on and the wireless light on the computer is blue. If the light is amber, press the wireless switch to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. NOTE:

information and the Web site links in Help and Support. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the 32 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to start a chat session with a support specialist or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). Contacting technical support 33 34 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R discs (purchased separately). NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVD+RW, and DVD-RW discs, are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of the recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. Creating recovery discs 35 Backing up your information NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software 36 Appendix A Backup and recovery Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

a. b. Display the screen. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. NOTE: Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. NOTE: Drivers, utilities, and programs installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Backing up your information 37 Backing up specific files or folders This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). NOTE:

the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Back up user created files and folders, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. NOTE: A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. NOTE:

amount of data being stored. To back up your entire hard drive:

1. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. 38 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE:

created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make copies of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE: Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup &

Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Backing up your information 39 Performing a recovery NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup

& Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up all personal files. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. 4. 5. 40 Appendix A Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. Back up all personal files. Performing a recovery 41 42 Appendix A Backup and recovery B Operating environment and input power Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating

-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 32F to 95F 41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Operating environment 43 Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 19 V dc @ 4.7 A - 90 W 4.74 A 44 Appendix B Operating environment and input power C Routine care Cleaning the display To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning CAUTION:

fluids, or chemicals on the display. To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the keyboard To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not WARNING!

use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Traveling and shipping The computer is built to go with you for work and play. For best results, follow the traveling and shipping tips described here. To prepare the computer for traveling and shipping, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up your information. Remove all optical discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards and ExpressCards. CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove discs from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. 3. 4. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with Shut down the computer. the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Cleaning the display 45 If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, place it in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, note that the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Contact technical support to discuss power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING!

equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the 46 Appendix C Routine care Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 15 A AC adapter connecting 4 identifying 1 accessory battery connector, identifying 17 altitude specifications 43 ambient light sensor, identifying 11 antennae external WWAN 13, 18 WLAN 18 WWAN 18 antivirus software 21 applications key, Windows 12 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 15 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 15 B backup files and folders 38 hard drive 38 modifications made to system 39 scheduling 39 battery charging 4 identifying 1 inserting 3 battery bay, identifying 17 battery light behavior 4 identifying 9 battery release latch, identifying 17 bay, battery 17 blank screen, troubleshooting 29 Bluetooth 24 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 13 buttons external WWAN antenna 13 info 16 keyboard light 11, 13 pointing stick 10 presentation 10 volume mute 10 Windows security 14 C cables and cords modem 1 power 1, 4, 46 camera light, identifying 11, 13 camera mode switch, identifying 11, 13 camera, identifying 11 caps lock light, identifying 9 charge level indicator, identifying 17 cleaning the display 45 cleaning the keyboard 45 compartments hard drive 17 memory module 17 wireless devices 17 components bottom 17 display 11 front 13 left-side 16 rear 14 right-side 15 top 9 wireless antennae 18 computer turning off 26 turning on 6, 28 computer viruses 21 connecting the computer to external power 4 connecting to a computer network 24 connectors accessory battery 17 docking 17 power 4, 14 convertible hinge, identifying 11 cord, power 46 creating recovery points 39 customer support Help and Support 19 user guides 19 D devices, external, troubleshooting 31 display cleaning 45 switching image 29 display release latch, identifying 13 Index 47 display switch, identifying 10 docking connector, identifying 17 documentation 19 drive light, identifying 9 E electric shock 22 emergency shutdown procedures 26, 30 entire hard drive backup 38 environmental specifications 43 esc key, identifying 12 ExpressCard slot, identifying 16 external devices, troubleshooting 31 external monitor port, identifying 14 external WWAN antenna button, identifying 13 external WWAN antenna, identifying 13, 18 F fingerprint reader, identifying 11, 15 firewalls 22 fn key, identifying 12 function keys, identifying 12 H hard drive backup 38 hard drive compartment, identifying 17 hard drive recovery 40 hardware identifying 20 installing 25 needed for setup 1 headphone (audio-out) jack 15 Help and Support 19 Hibernation 29 hinge, convertible, identifying 11 humidity specifications 43 I IEC 60950 compliance 23, 31 IEEE 1394 port, identifying 15 image, switching, among display devices 29 info button, identifying 16 input power specifications 44 inserting the battery 3 internal display switch, identifying 10 internal microphones, identifying 11 48 Index J jacks audio-in (microphone) 15 audio-out (headphone) 15 RJ-11 (modem) 14 RJ-45 (network 14 K keyboard light button, identifying 11, 13 keyboard light, identifying 11 keyboard, cleaning 45 keypad keys, identifying 12 keys esc 12 fn 12 function 12 keypad 12 Windows applications 12 Windows logo 12 L labels, service tag 33 LAN (local area network) 24 latch, battery release 17 latch, display release, identifying 13 lights battery 4, 9 camera 11, 13 caps lock 9 drive 9 keyboard 11 mute 9 num lock 9 power 6, 9 volume down 9 volume mute 9 volume up 9 wireless 16 M Media Card Reader, identifying 15 memory module compartment 17 microphone (audio-in) jack 15 microphones, internal, identifying 11 modem cable 1 modem, surge protection 22 monitor port, external 14 monitor, external 29 mute button, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 9 N network, connecting computer to 24 Norton Internet Security 21 num lock light, identifying 9 O operating environment specifications 43 operating system version number 33 overheating, computer 31 P pen slot, identifying 16 pointing stick buttons, identifying 10 pointing stick, identifying 10 ports 1394 15 external monitor 14 USB 15, 16 posture 23 power connector identifying 14 using 4 power cord connecting 4 identifying 1 power light behavior 6 identifying 9 power options 29 power specifications 44 power surges 22 power switch identifying 13 using 6 presentation button, identifying 10 privacy, protecting 21 Product Id 33 R reader, fingerprint, identifying 11, 15 recovery discs creating 7, 35 using 40 recovery partition 41 recovery points 39 registration number, operating system 33 regulatory information notices 23 release latch, battery 17 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 14 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 14 S safe computing practices 22 Safety & Comfort Guide 23 scheduling backups 39 security cable slot, identifying 15 serial number 33 service tag 33 setup, computer 1 shipping the computer 45 shutdown procedures 26 SIM slot, identifying 17 Sleep 29 slots ExpressCard 16 Media Card Reader 15 pen 16 security cable 15 SIM 17 Smart card reader, identifying 16 software antivirus 21 identifying 20 installing 25 setup 6 troubleshooting 29 updating 26 speaker, identifying 17 specifications altitude 43 input power 44 operating environment 43 startup problems, troubleshooting 28 surge protection 22 switches camera mode 11, 13 power 6, 13 wireless 16 system backup 38 system recovery points 39 T technical support 33 temperature safety considerations 23, 31 specifications 43 troubleshooting 31 Index 49 traveling with the computer 43, 45 troubleshooting blank screen 29 display problems 29 external device problems 31 overheating problems 31 resources 27 software problems 29 startup problems 28 unresponsive computer 30 wireless network problems 32 turning off the computer 26 turning on the computer 6, 28 U unresponsive computer, troubleshooting 30 USB ports, identifying 15, 16 user guides 19 V vents identifying 16, 17 overheating 31 precautions 23, 31 viruses 21 volume down light, identifying 9 volume mute button, identifying 10 volume mute light, identifying 9 volume scroll zone, identifying 10 volume up light, identifying 9 W Windows applications key, identifying 12 Windows logo key, identifying 12 Windows security button, identifying 14 wireless device compartment 17 wireless light, identifying 16 wireless network problems, troubleshooting 32 wireless switch, identifying 16 WLAN (wireless local area network) 24 WLAN antenna, identifying 18 work habits 23 workstation setup 23 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 24 WWAN antenna, identifying 18 50 Index

 

 

Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN User Guide With your wireless network card, you can access wireless networks, share files or printers, or even share your Internet connection. All of these features can be explored with a wireless network in your home or office. This wireless local area network (WLAN) solution is designed for both home and business use. Additional users and features can be added as your networking needs grow and change. Your Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN adapter is compatible with 802.11a, 802.11b 802.11g and 802.11n wireless standards. Operating at 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz frequency at speeds of up to 54 Mbps you can now connect your computer to existing high-speed networks that use multiple access points within large or small environments. Your wireless adapter maintains automatic data rate control according to access point location to achieve the fastest possible connection. All of your wireless network connections are easily managed by Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software. Profiles that are set up through the Intel PROSet/Wireless software provide enhanced security measures with 802.1x network authentication. NOTE: The software is compatible with the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN, Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection and the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Table of Contents Use Intel PROSet/Wireless Software Connect to a Network Use Profiles Set up Security Troubleshooting Administrator Tool Glossary Wireless Network Overview Security Overview Specifications Customer Support Safety and Regulatory Information Warranty Adapter Registration Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 20042006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 USA The copying or reproducing of any material in this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Intel Corporation is strictly forbidden. Intel(R) is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Intel disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.

"Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!!

Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, channel scanning, and human exposure. For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties of the software provided in binary format with the wireless LAN adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and (iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing support to any third parties for such modified products. Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be "modules", and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be non-compliant."

October 2006 Back to Contents Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software Use Intel PROSet/Wireless as your Wireless Manager Start Intel PROSet/Wireless Start Intel PROSet/Wireless from the Taskbar l Taskbar Icons l Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window l Wireless Networks List l Connection Status Icons l Network Properties l Connection Details l Profiles List Intel PROSet/Wireless Menus l Tools Menu m Application Settings m Intel Wireless Troubleshooter m Administrator Tool l Advanced Menu m Adapter Settings m Advanced Statistics m Use Windows to Manage Wi-Fi l Profiles Menu m Manage Profiles m Manage Exclusions Turn Wireless Radio On or Off Install and Uninstall the Software Use Intel PROSet/Wireless as your Wireless Manager Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless is used to setup, edit and manage network profiles to connect to a network. It also includes advanced settings such as power management and channel selection for setting up ad-hoc networks. If you use Microsoft(R) Windows(R) XP Wireless Zero Configuration as your wireless manager, you can disable it from the Microsoft Windows Wireless Network tab. To disable Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration as your wireless manager:

1. Click Start Settings Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. 4. Click Properties. 5. Click Wireless Networks. 6. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is not selected. If it is, clear it. 7. Click OK. This confirms that the Intel PROSet/Wireless utility is configured to manage your network profiles. NOTE: Verify that the Application Settings option Notify when another application uses the wireless adapter is selected. This option prompts you when Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration starts to manage your network profiles. Start Intel PROSet/Wireless To start Intel PROSet/Wireless, use one of the following methods:

l Click Start Programs Intel PROSet Wireless Intel PROSet Wireless. l Right-click the Taskbar icon located in the lower right corner of your Windows Desktop to open the Taskbar menu. Click Open Intel PROSet/Wireless. l Double-click the Taskbar icon to open Intel PROSet/Wireless. To close Intel PROSet/Wireless from the main window, use one of the following:

l Select File Exit from the main window. l Click Close. l Click the Close button (X) at the top right corner of the window. Start Intel PROSet/Wireless from the Taskbar To start Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless, double-click the Taskbar icon desktop or right-click the Taskbar icon and click Open Intel PROSet/Wireless. located in the lower right corner of your Windows Taskbar Menu Options The Intel PROSet/Wireless icon displays on the Taskbar located in the lower right corner of your Windows desktop. Right-

click the status icon to display the menu options. Menu Item Open Intel PROSet/Wireless Open Wireless Zero Configuration Wireless On Wireless Off 802.11a Radio Off Open Intel Wireless Troubleshooter Connect to Profile Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to manage Wi-

Fi Taskbar Icons Comments Click to start Intel PROSet/Wireless when Intel PROSet/Wireless is your wireless manager. If you select Use Windows to manage Wi-

Fi from the Taskbar menu, the menu option changes to Open Wireless Zero Configuration and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service is used as your wireless manager. When you use Microsoft Windows, you cannot use your Intel profiles. If you have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed, the current state of the radio displays in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window and on the Taskbar. Select Wireless On to turn the radio on. Select Wireless Off to turn the radio off. If your computer has an external switch installed, use it to switch the radio on or off. Refer to your computer manufacturer's documentation for more information about this switch. This option is available only for wireless adapters that support 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g. Select to turn off the 802.11a radio. NOTE: This setting is unavailable unless it is set in the Administrator Tool or if your adapter is an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Opens an application that can assist you to resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop. See Intel Wireless Troubleshooter for more information. Displays the current profiles in the Profile list. Used also to connect to a profile. Toggles between the Intel PROSet/Wireless and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service. When you use Microsoft Windows, you cannot use your Intel profiles. The Taskbar icon provides visual indication of the current wireless connection state. The connection status icon is located on the lower right corner of your Windows desktop. The Taskbar icon can be set to display or be hidden in the Tools Menu Application Settings. Icon Description Wireless Off: The wireless adapter is off. The wireless device does not transmit or receive while it is off. Click Wireless On to enable the adapter. The icon is white and static. Searching for wireless networks: The wireless adapter searches for any available wireless networks. The icon is white with animation. No wireless networks found: There are no available wireless networks found. Intel PROSet/Wireless periodically scans for available networks. If you want to force a scan, double-click the icon to launch Intel PROSet/

Wireless and click Refresh. The icon is red. Wireless network found: An available wireless network is found. Double-click the icon to display the Wireless Networks list. Select the network. Click Connect. The icon is yellow. Authentication failed: Unable to authenticate with wireless network. The icon is green with a yellow warning triangle. Connecting to a wireless network: Flashes while an IP address is being obtained or an error occurs. Connected to a wireless network: Connected to a wireless network. A Tool Tip displays network name, speed, signal quality and IP address. The icon is green with waves that reflect signal quality. The more waves, the better the signal quality. Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts The Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts provide feedback and interaction. To display Tool Tips, move your mouse pointer over the icon. Desktop alerts are displayed when your wireless network changes state. For example, if you are out of range of any wireless networks, a desktop alert is displayed when you come into range. Select Show Information Notifications in the Application Settings to enable desktop alerts. Tool Tips Tool tips display when the mouse pointer rolls over the icon. The tool tips display text for each of the connection states. Desktop Alerts When user action is required, a desktop alert displays. If you click the alert, then an appropriate action is taken. For example when wireless networks are found, the following alert displays:

Action: Click the desktop alert to connect to network in the Wireless Networks list. Once connected, the alert displays the wireless network that you are connected to, the speed of the connection, signal quality and IP address. Desktop alerts are also used to indicate if there is a connection problem. Click the alert to open the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window The Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window allows you to:

l View the current connection status (signal quality, speed and current network name). l Scan for available wireless networks. l Manage profiles. l Auto-connect profiles to available networks in a specific order defined in the Profile list. l Connect to Infrastructure and Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. l Configure adapter settings. l Troubleshoot wireless connection problems. Connection Status Icons The connection status icons indicate the current connection status of your wireless adapter. The connection status icon displays in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. The Taskbar icon also indicates the current connection status. Refer to Taskbar Icons for more information. Main Window Connection Status Description The icons are used to designate connection status. Icon Description Wireless Off: The radio is not associated to a network. Click the Wireless On button to enable the radio. Indicates connection problems including authentication failures. Searching for wireless networks: The wireless adapter is scanning for any available wireless networks. Animated Icons:

No wireless networks found: The adapter does not find any available wireless networks. Wireless network found: An available wireless network is found. You can choose to connect to available networks displayed in the Wireless Networks list. Connecting to a wireless network. You are connecting to a wireless network. The crescent shaped curves switch between green and white until an IP Address is obtained or a connection error occurs. Connected to a wireless network: You are connected to a wireless network. The network name, speed, signal quality, and IP address display the current connection status. Click the Details button to display details of the current network connection. Network Name Signal Quality Name (Profile Name or SSID): The name of the network that the adapter is connected to. The Name column displays the SSID or the Profile name if a profile for the network is available. The signal quality icon bars indicate the quality of the transmit and receive signals between your wireless adapter and the nearest access point or computer in Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The number of vertical green bars indicates the strength of the transmit and receive signals. The signal quality ranges from excellent to out of range. The following factors affect signal quality:

l Signal quality decreases with distance and is affected by metal and concrete barriers. l Metal objects can reflect signals and cause interference. l Other electrical devices can cause interference. Properties Provides adapter connection status information. See Properties Button for information. Wireless On (Off) Switch the radio off and on. Refer to Turn Wireless On or Off for more information. Help?

Close Provides help information for this page. Closes the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Wireless Networks List The Wireless Networks list displays a list of wireless networks within range of the adapter. Name Network Name Description The signal strength of the wireless network access point or computer (Device to Device [ad hoc] mode). The signal strength icon bars indicate that the wireless network or computer is available for connection but is still not is associated with an access point or computer (Device to Device [ad hoc] mode). Name (Profile Name or SSID): The name of the network that the adapter is connected to. The Name column displays the SSID or the Profile name if a profile for the network is available. If an access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID) or the wireless adapter receives a hidden network name from a stealth access point, <SSID not broadcast is displayed in the Wireless Networks list. To associate with an <SSID not broadcast network entry, a new profile must be created before connection. After connection, the <SSID not broadcast is still displayed in the Wireless Networks list. The associated SSID profile is viewed in the Profiles list. Notification that the adapter is connecting to the wireless network. Once connected, the status is changed to Connected. Profiles: Identifies a network in the Wireless Networks list that is connected and has a profile in the profiles list. The wireless network uses Network (Infrastructure) mode. The wireless network uses Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The wireless network uses Security encryption. The band frequency being used by the wireless network (802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, or 802.11n). The wireless network is on the exclusion list or the profile is configured for manual connection. Click to connect to a wireless network. Once connected, the button changes to Disconnect. Provides detailed information about the connected network and its access points. See Network Properties for information. Refreshes the list of available networks. If any new networks are available within the adapter range, the list is updated to show the new network name. Switch the radio off and on. Refer to Turn Wireless On or Off for more information. Closes the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window. Provides help information for this page. Status Connect

(Disconnect) Properties Refresh Wireless On (Off) Close Help?

Network Properties Click the Properties button on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window to display the security settings for the wireless adapter. You can also add profiles to be excluded from automatic connection. If network exclusion is enabled (see Application Settings) then the Network Properties also indicates if the network is excluded from automatic connection. Network Properties details Name<

Network Name Band Description Displays the wireless network name. Current band and frequency being used. Displays Out of Range if no band and frequency is displayed. The following bands are listed:

l 802.11a l 802.11b l 802.11g Operation Mode Displays the current operating mode:

l Network (Infrastructure) A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. l Device to Device (ad hoc) A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-computer network. Authentication Level Displays the current authentication security mode for the profile being used. The following network authentication levels are listed:

l Open l Shared l WPA-Enterprise l WPA2-Enterprise l WPA-Personal l WPA2-Personal Data Encryption The following Data Encryption settings are listed:

Displays the 802.11 authentication used by the currently used profile. Refer to Security Settings for more information. l None l WEP l TKIP l CKIP l AES-CCMP Access Points in this Network (0-50) Refer to Security Settings for more information. l Signal Strength: The Signal strength icon bars indicate the strength of the transmit and receive signals between your wireless adapter and the nearest access point. l Displays one of the following icons:

. Indicates the band being used (802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n). l Channel: Displays the current transmit and receive channel being used for a particular wireless network. l BSSID (Infrastructure operating mode): Displays the twelve-digit MAC address of the access point of the selected network. Manage Exclusions Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Close Help?

Closes the Network Properties. Provides help information for this page. Connection Details When you are connected to a network, click the Details button on the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window to display the Connection Details. Connection Details Description Name Profile Name Network Name IPv4 Address Signal Quality Description Name of the profile. Network Name (SSID) of the current connection. Internet Protocol (IP) address for the current connection. A radio frequency (RF) signal can be assessed by two components:

Signal Strength l signal strength (quantity) l signal quality The quality of the signal is determined by a combination of factors. Primarily it is composed of signal strength and the ratio of the RF noise present. RF noise occurs both naturally and artificially by electrical equipment. If the amount of the RF noise is high, or the signal strength is low, it results in a lower signal to noise ratio which causes poorer signal quality. With a low signal to noise ratio, it is difficult for the radio receiver to discern the data information contained in the signal from the noise itself. The signal strength icon bars indicate the quality of the transmit and receive signals between your wireless adapter and the access point or computer in Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The number of vertical green bars indicates the strength of the transmit and receive signals. NOTE: The signal strength is displayed for the closest AP for networks that contains multiple APs. The signal strength ranges from excellent to out of range. The following factors affect signal strength:

l Signal quality decreases with distance and is affected by metal and concrete barriers. l Metal objects can reflect signals and cause interference. l Other electrical devices can cause interference. Adapter MAC Address Band Media Access Control (MAC) address for the wireless adapter. Indicates the wireless band of the current connection. l 802.11a l 802.11b l 802.11g Supported Data Rates Rates at which the wireless adapter can send and receive data. Displays the speed in Mbps for the frequency being used. l 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 l 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 l 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Radio Frequency Displays the frequency of the current wireless connection. l 802.11a: 5.15 GHz to 5.85 GHz l 802.11b/g: 2.400 GHz to 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) Channel Number Network Authentication Displays the transmit and receive channel. Displays Open, Shared, WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-

Enterprise. Displays the 802.11 authentication used by the currently used profile. Refer to Security Overview for more information. Data Encryption 802.1x Authentication Type Displays None, WEP, TKIP or AES-CCMP. Refer to Security Overview for more information. Displays None, MD5, EAP-SIM, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, or EAP-FAST. Refer to Security Overview for more information. 802.1x Authentication Protocol Displays None, PAP, MD5, GTC, CHAP, MS-CHAP, MS-CHAP-V2 or TLS. Refer to CCX Version Current TX Power Supported Power Levels Access Point MAC Address Mandatory Access Point Repair Close Help?

Security Overview for more information. Version of the Cisco Compatible Extensions on this wireless connection. Cisco Compatible Extensions Transmit Power Levels. 1.0, 5.0, 20.0, 31.6, 50.1 mW The Media Access Control (MAC) address for the associated access point. Displays None, if not enabled. If enabled, from the Mandatory Access Point setting, the access point MAC address is displayed. This option directs the wireless adapter to connect to an access point that uses a specific MAC address (48-bit 12 hexadecimal digits, for example, 00:06:25:0E:9D:84). Renews the IP Address. If you have trouble accessing the network, verify if the IP address is valid. If it is 0.0.0.0 or 169.x.x.x, then it is probably not valid. If your network is setup for automatic network address assignment, then click Repair and request a new IP address. Closes the page. Provides help information for this page. Profile Management On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, click Connect on a wireless network. Once connected, a profile is created in the Profiles list. The Profiles List displays the current user profiles in the order that they are to be applied. Use the up and down arrows to arrange profiles in a specific order to automatically connect to a wireless network. You can also add, edit, and remove profiles from the Profiles list. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Different profiles can be configured for each wireless network. Profile settings can include, the network name (SSID), operating mode, and security settings. See Profile Management for more information. Profiles List Icons Name Profile Name Description Profiles are network settings that allow your wireless adapter to connect to a network access point

(Network [Infrastructure] mode) or computer (Device to Device (ad hoc) mode) which does not use an access point. Refer to Set up Profiles for more information. Network Name Name (Profile Name or SSID): The name of the network that the adapter is connected to. The Name column displays the SSID or the Profile name if a profile for the network is available. Connection Icons: The following network profile status icons indicate the different connection states of the adapter with a wireless network, the type of operating mode being used, and whether network security is being used. Blue circle: The wireless adapter is associated with an access point or computer (ad hoc mode). If a profile has 802.1x security enabled, this indicates that the wireless adapter is associated and authenticated. Indicates Infrastructure mode. Indicates Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The wireless network uses Security encryption. Arrows Position profiles in a preferred order for auto-connection. l Up-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile up in the Profiles list. l Down-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile down in the Profiles list. Connect Add Remove Properties If the network is in range, and the profile matches the configuration of the network, then a connection is made. Opens the Create Wireless Profile General Settings, which is used to create a new profile. Refer to Create a New Profile for more information. Removes a selected profile from the Profile list. Refer to Delete a Profile for more information. Enables you to edit the contents of an existing profile. Refer to Edit an Existing Profile for more information. Export/Import: Allows you to import and export user-based profiles to and from the Profile list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profile list. See Import and Export Profiles for more information. Close Help?

Closes the profile management window. Provides help information for this page. Menus Use the File, Tools, Advanced, Profiles and Help menus to configure your network settings. Name File Tools Description Exit: Close the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Application Settings: Use to set system wide connection preferences. Refer to Application Settings for information. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter: Use to resolve wireless network connection problems. Refer to Intel Wireless Troubleshooter for more information. Administrator Tool: Used by administrators or the person who has administrator privileges on this computer to configure shared profiles (Pre-logon/Common, Persistent, and Voice over IP [VoIP]). The Administrator Tool can also be used by an Information Technology department to configure user settings within the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software and to create custom install packages to export to other systems. Refer to Administrator Tool for more information. NOTE: The Administrator Tool is available only if it installed during a custom installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Software for more information on custom installation. Advanced Adapter Settings:Displays Adapter Settings that are equivalent to the settings in the Microsoft Windows Advanced settings. Refer to Adapter Settings for information. To access Adapter Settings from Microsoft Windows:

l Select Network Connections from the Windows Control Panel l Right-click the Wireless Network Connection. l Select Properties from the menu. l Click Configure to display the Advanced settings for the adapter. Advanced Statistics: Select to determine how the adapter communicates with an access point. Refer to Advanced Statistics for more information. Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi: Select to enable Windows XP as the wireless manager. Refer to Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration for more information. Profiles Manage Profiles: Select to create or edit profiles. Manage Exclusions: Select to exclude networks from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Intel PROSet/Wireless Help: Starts the online help. Help About: Displays version information for the currently installed application components. Application Settings (Tools menu) The Application Settings control the behavior of the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software. Application Settings Description Name Adapter Description Lists the network adapter that are currently available. It may be either an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, an Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Advanced Settings: The following settings control how Intel PROSet/Wireless behaves and displays information. Taskbar Show application icon on the taskbar: Select to display the Taskbar status icon. This icon resides on the Windows Taskbar (Notification Area). This icon provides the status of your wireless connection. Clear to not display the Taskbar status icon. Notifications Auto Connect Manage Exclusions Wireless Networks List Shared Folder Notification Device to Device (ad hoc) Network Notification Network Name (SSID) Notification The Taskbar Status Icon provides several functions:

l Visual feedback for the connection state and wireless activity of your wireless network. The icon changes color and animation for different wireless activity. See Taskbar Icons for more information. l Menu: A menu is displayed when you right click the icon. From this menu you perform tasks such as turn on or off the radio or launch the Intel PROSet/Wireless application. See Taskbar Menu Options for more information. l Tool tips and desktop alerts. See:Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts for more information. Show Alert Notifications: Select to display desktop alerts next to the taskbar icon. When your action is required, a message displays. Only events of high importance trigger a desktop alert. If the desktop alert is selected, then the appropriate action is taken. Clear to not display desktop alerts. Refer to Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts for more information. Select one of the following options:

Information Notifications: These desktop alerts are of lower importance. They do not require your interaction but can greatly improve the wireless experience. l Show Information Notifications: Selected by default. All informational desktop alerts are displayed next to the taskbar status icon. These desktop alerts improve your wireless experience with notifications when available wireless networks are within range. They also inform you when a wireless connection has been made or has been lost. Refer to Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts for more information. l Show a list of available networks when not connected:

When Show Information Notifications is cleared, you can select this item. When the desktop alerts are disabled, this option allows you to continue to be notified of available networks when the wireless adapter is not connected. Notify when another application uses the wireless adapter: When selected, a message is displayed when other applications are trying to manage your wireless adapter. This is helpful if you use software provided by a hotspot location (coffee shop, airport terminal). To take advantage of the Intel PROSet/Wireless features, disable this software when you leave the hotspot. Enable TLS rejected certificates notification: Select if you want a warning issued when a PEAP-TLS certificate is rejected by the authentication server. See Enterprise Security and Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication for more information. Connect to available network using profiles only: (Default) Connect the wireless adapter to an available network with a matching profile from the Profiles List. If no matching profile is found, you are notified

(see Notifications). The wireless device remains disconnected until a matching profile is found or you configure a new matching profile. Connect to any available network if no matching profile found:

Select to connect to a network automatically if you have not configured a profile and are at a location that has an open, unsecured wireless network. NOTE: Open networks have no security. You would need to provide your own security for this wireless connection. One way to secure an open wireless connection is with Virtual Private Networking

(VPN) software. Connect to any network based on profiles only (Cisco mode):

Select to try every profile in preferred order. This signifies that you are in the vicinity of an access point which has more than one SSID but only advertises one. Enable automatic exclude list feature: Select to enable the automatic exclude list feature. This feature provides a way to exclude access points from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Enable manual exclude list feature: Select to enable the manual exclude list feature. This feature provides a way to exclude networks from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Show column sort headers: Select to display the column names in the Wireless Networks list. Click a column header to sort the column in either ascending or descending order. File and printer sharing enables other computers on a network to access resources on your computer. You should be cautious when you use your wireless notebook computer with file and printer sharing enabled. Use this feature to receive notifications when you connect to a wireless network with shared folders that meet one of the following conditions:

l The Microsoft Windows firewall is disabled l File and Printer Sharing are enabled as an exception to the Microsoft Windows firewall settings. Automatically remove shared folders when connected to an unsecured network Select to hide shared folders automatically each time you connect to an open, unsecured network. Disable this notification Select to maintain your current shared folder settings each time you connect to an open, unsecured network. Notify when connected to an unsecured network Select to receive notification each time you are connected to an open, unsecured network. Receive alerts dependent on the following settings when connected to an ad hoc network. You are alerted every two minutes, with a maximum of five alerts. Notify when no peers have joined the ad hoc network Select to receive notification if no peers join the ad hoc network. Notify when all peers leave the ad hoc network Select to receive an alert when all the peers leave the ad hoc network. Network Name (SSID) alert notice Notifies you when the default network name (SSID) is used to connect to a network. Common examples of pre-defined, default network names are: wireless, WLAN, linksys, default. Connecting to an access point that has the default network name (SSID) can be a security problem. This access point usually uses all the default security and, management settings (for example, Open authentication;

default IP address, user name, or password). If this is a personal network, change the network name and security settings to improve the security of the network. OK Cancel Help?

Notify when connected to a network with the default SSID name Select to receive an alert when connected to a network with the default network name. Save settings and return to the previous page. Closes and cancels changes. Provides help information for this page. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter (Tools menu) Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is an application that can help you resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop. Once you click the desktop alert, a diagnostic message displays the recommended steps to resolve the connection problem. For example, if a connection problem occurred because of an invalid password, the Profile manager application is launched when you click a displayed hyperlink. You can also launch Wireless Event Viewer and enable or disable alert notifications. The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is supported under Windows XP and Windows 2000 The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter page contains two panes. Use your left mouse button on the left pane to display a list of available tools. The right pane displays the current connection issue in a section. Each section has two parts: the error message and the recommended action. The recommended action contains descriptions about available utilities and helps to resolve the associated connection issue. If you click a help link, the help text is displayed in a window. If you click the associated issue resolution link, a program is launched to resolve the connection issue. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for information on resolving errors. Name Menu Options File Wireless Event Viewer: Launches Wireless Event Viewer. Description Disable Notification/Enable Notification: Select to disable or enable alert notifications. Exit: Click to exit the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter application. View Displays or removes the History data on the right panel of the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Tools Manual Diagnostics Tool: Run diagnostic test to verify the functionality of your wireless adapter. Refer to Manual Diagnostics Tool for more information. Help Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter Help: Displays online help for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Available Help Date Time error message:

l Description of error. l Link to resolve error (if available). See Resolve Errors below. l Link to recommended steps to resolve error. History Maintains a list of the last five alerts. The alerts are listed chronologically, with the most recent alert at the top of the list. Administrator Tool (Tools menu) The Administrator tool is for administrators or the person who has administrator privileges on this computer. This tool allows the administrator to restrict what level of control the users of this computer have over their wireless connections. This tool is used also to configure common (shared) profiles. Users cannot modify Administrator settings or profiles unless they have the password for this tool. A password should be chosen that is secure and not easily guessed. You can export these settings and profiles as one package to other computers on your network. For more information, refer to the Administrator Tool section. Name Application Settings Description An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. Refer to Administrator Tool Application Settings. Administrator Profiles Enable or disable Persistent or Pre-logon/Common profiles and configure Voice over IP

(VoIP) settings on the computer. Refer to Administrator Tool Profiles. Adapter Settings An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. Refer to Administrator Tool Adapter Settings. Software Select which of the Intel PROSet/Wireless applications are installed on a user's computers. Refer to Administrator Tool Software. EAP-FAST A-ID Groups An administrator can select which Authority Identifier (A-ID) radius server to provision Protected Access Credentials (PACs) for profiles that use EAP-FAST authentication. A-ID groups are shared by all users of the computer and allow EAP-FAST profiles to support multiple PACs from multiple A-IDs. Refer to Administrator Tool EAP-FAST A-ID Groups. Administrator Packages Change Password Close Help?

The Administrator Packages are used to save administrative profiles and other settings. You can copy or send this self-extracting executable to clients on your network. When it is run, the contents are installed and configured on the destination computer. Refer to Administrator Tool Packages. Change the password for the Administrator Tool. See Change Password for more information. Closes the page. Provides help information for this page. Adapter Settings (Advanced menu) The Adapter Settings displays the device properties for the wireless adapter installed on your computer. It may be one of the following network connection adapters:

l Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN l Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ l Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection l Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection l Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection l Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Adapter Settings Description Name Description 802.11n Channel Width Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20Mhz. Auto is the default setting. Use 20MHz if 802.11n channels are restricted. 802.11n Mode Ad Hoc Channel NOTE: This setting is available only if the adapter is an Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_. The 802.11n standard builds upon previous 802.11x standards by adding multiple-

input multiple-output (MIMO). MIMO increases data throughput to improve transfer rate. Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11n mode of the adapter. Enabled is the default setting. An administrator can enable or disable support for high throughput mode to reduce power-consumption or conflicts with other bands or compatibility issues. NOTE: This setting is available only if the adapter is an Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_. Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel from the default channel, there is no need to change the channel. Value: Select the allowed operating channel from the list. l 802.11b/g: Select this option when 802.11b and 802.11g (2.4 GHz) ad hoc l 802.11a: Select this option when 802.11a (5 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is band frequency is used. used. Ad Hoc Power Management Set power saving features for Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. NOTE: When an 802.11a channel is not displayed, ad hoc networks are not supported for the channel. l Disable: Select when connecting to ad hoc networks that contain stations that do not support ad hoc power management. l Maximum Power Savings: Select to optimize battery life. l Noisy Environment: Select to optimize performance or connecting with multiple clients. Ad Hoc QoS Mode NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM

(Wi-Fi MultiMedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA). When WMM is enabled, the adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. l WMM Enabled.(Default) l WMM Disabled Mixed mode protection Power Management NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Allows you to select a balance between power consumption and adapter performance. The wireless adapter power settings slider sets a balance between the computer's power source and the battery. l Use default value: (Default) Power settings are based on the computer's power source. l Manual: Adjust the slider for the desired setting. Use the lowest setting for maximum battery life. Use the highest setting for maximum performance. Preamble Mode NOTE: Power consumption savings vary based on infrastructure settings. Changes the preamble length setting received by the access point during an initial connection. Always use a long preamble length to connect to an access point. Auto Tx Preamble allows automatic preamble detection. If supported, short preamble should be used. If not, use long preamble (Long Tx Preamble). Preferred Band NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection. Select the operating band. The selections are:

style="LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc" type=disc l 802.11g l 802.11a l 802.11b Roaming Aggressiveness NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. This setting allows you to define how aggressively your wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point. l Default: Balanced setting between not roaming and performance. l Lowest: Your wireless client will not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point. l Highest: Your wireless client continuously tracks the link quality. If any degradation occurs, it tries to find and roam to a better access point. Throughput Enhancement Changes the value of the Packet Burst Control. l Enable: Select to enable throughput enhancement. l Disable: (Default) Select to disable throughput enhancement. Transmit Power Default Setting: Highest power setting Lowest Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to a lowest transmit power. Enable you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduce the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoid congestion and interference with other devices. Highest Maximum Coverage: Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional radio devices. NOTE:T he optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that this radio shares radio spectrum with. Wireless Mode NOTE: This setting takes effect when either Infrastructure or ad hoc mode is used. Select which band to use for connection to a wireless network:

l 802.11a only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a networks only. l 802.11b only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b networks only. l 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11g networks only. l 802.11a and 802.11g: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a and 802.11g l 802.11b and 802.11g: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. networks only. l 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) - Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. NOTE: These wireless modes (Modulation type) determine the discovered access points displayed in the Wireless Networks list. OK Cancel NOTE: This setting is not applicable for a Windows Vista(TM) client. Saves settings and returns to the previous page. Closes and cancels any changes. Advanced Statistics (Advanced menu) The Advanced Statistics provides current adapter connection information. Advanced Statistics Description Name Statistics Description Advanced Statistics: This information pertains to how the adapter communicates with an access point. Association: If the adapter finds an access point to communicate with, the value is within range. Otherwise, the value is out of range. style="margin-left: 80px;"

l AP MAC Address: The twelve digit MAC address (00:40:96:31:1C:05) of the AP. the adapter. adapter. l Number of associations: The number of times the access point has found l AP count: The number of available access points within range of the wireless l Number of full scans: The number of times the adapter has scanned all channels for receiving information. l Number of partial scans: The number of scans that have been terminated. Roaming: This information contains counters that are related to reasons for the adapter roaming. Roaming occurs when an adapter communicates with one access point and then communicates with another for better signal strength. style="margin-left: 80px;"

l Roaming Count: The number of times that roaming occurred. l AP did not transmit: The adapter did not receive radio transmission from the access point. You may need to reset the access point. l Poor beacon quality: The signal quality is too low to sustain communication with the access point. Either you have moved the adapter outside the coverage area of the access point or the access point's device address information has been changed. l AP load balancing: The access point ended its association with the adapter based on the access point's inability to maintain communication with all its associated adapters. Too many adapters are trying to communicate with one access point. l AP RSSI too low: The Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is too low to maintain an association with the adapter. You may have moved outside the coverage area of the access point or the access point could have increased its data rate. l Poor channel quality: The quality of the channel is low and caused the adapter to look for another access point. l AP dropped mobile unit: The access point dropped a computer from the list of recognizable mobile devices. The computer must re-associate with an access point. Miscellaneous: Use this information to determine if an association with a different access point increases performance and helps maintain the highest possible data rate. style="margin-left: 80px;"

l Received Beacons: Number of beacons received by the adapter. l Percent missed Beacons: Percent value for missed beacons. l Percent transmit errors: The percentage of data transmissions that had errors. l Signal Strength: Signal strength of the access point that the adapter communicates with displayed in decibels (dBm). Transmit/Receive (Tx/Rx) Statistics Displays percent values for non-directed and directed packets. Total host packets: The sum total number of directed and non-directed packets counts. m Transmit - (Mbps) m Receive - (Mbps) Non-directed packets: The number of received packets broadcast to the wireless network. Directed packets: The number of received packets sent specifically to the wireless adapter. Logging Total Bytes: The total number of bytes for packets received and sent by the wireless adapter. Set the duration that you want to record statistical data for your wireless adapter. Configure logging settings: Click Settings to set how frequently you want to log the statistics. You can set the number of seconds and how many hours you want the statistics to be logged. To change the storage location of the log file. 1. Click Browse to specify a new log file location. The current path is displayed. The default location is in the Intel PROSet/Wireless Program Files directory. 2. Click Open to close and apply the new file path. 3. Click Close to exit Advanced Statistics. Reset Stats Close Help?

Resets the adapter statistical counters back to zero and begins taking new data measurements. Closes and returns to the main window. Provides help information for this page. Use Windows to Manage Wi-Fi (Advanced menu) The Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration feature provides a built-in wireless configuration utility. This feature can be enabled and disabled within Intel PROSet/Wireless. Click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi on the Advanced menu or the Taskbar menu. If Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration is enabled, the features in Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless are disabled. Exclude List Management (Profiles menu) Exclude List Management is available when you either select Manage Exclusions from the Profiles menu or click the Properties button on the Wireless Networks list. NOTE: If an administrator has designated a network for exclusion, only an administrator within the Administrator Tool may remove the network from the Exclude List. IMPORTANT: You are not automatically connected to a network or an access point that is in this list. Use Exclude List Management to exclude entire wireless networks (SSID). Name Exclude List Management Description l Network Name: Name (SSID) of the wireless network. l Radio: Displays the band if there is a DHCP error. l MAC Address: The Ethernet MAC address of the device. l Reason: Explains why this entry was excluded from automatic connection. l Details: Provides specific information on how the access point was excluded and how to remove it from exclusion. This network has been excluded from automatic connection for the following reasons.

-User has excluded this network manually. To make this network (or access points) eligible for automatic connection again, select it and click the Remove button. Note:

- The Reset button removes all entries except rogue access points from the list.

- Rogue access points are removed from the list when a connection is made to this access point using valid credentials.

- All excluded access points in a network (other than rogue) are removed from the list when a profile for that network is applied manually Add NOTE: Entries that are dimmed are excluded rouge access points. A rogue access point is any access point unsanctioned by network administrators. These entries cannot be removed from the list. Click the Add button to enter the network name (SSID) that you want to add to the Exclude List. 1. Network Name: Enter the network name. 2. Click OK. Remove Remove an entry from the list. 1. Select the entry from the list. 2. Click Remove. 3. You are asked: Do you want to remove the selected item from the Exclude List?

4. Click Yes to remove the network from the list. Reset list Close Help?

Removes all of the networks and access points from the Exclude List. Closes page and saves settings. Provides help information for this page. Turn Wireless Radio On or Off To switch the wireless radio on or off, use one of the following:

l The optional hardware radio switch on your computer l Intel PROSet/Wireless software l Microsoft Windows NOTE: When your computer is switched on, the radio is constantly transmitting signals. In certain situations, as in an airplane, signals from the radio may cause interference. Use the following methods if you need to disable the radio and use your notebook without emitting radio signals. Use the Optional Computer Radio On or Off Switch If your computer has an external switch installed, use it to switch the radio on or off. Refer to the computer manufacturer for more information about this switch. If you have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed, the current state of the radio displays in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window and on the Taskbar. Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to Switch the Radio On or Off From Intel PROSet/Wireless, the radio can be switched on or off. The status icon on Intel PROSet/Wireless displays the current state of the radio. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main Window, click Wireless On or Wireless Off to toggle the radio on or off. Switch the Radio On or Off from the Taskbar Icon To switch the radio on or off, click the Taskbar icon and select Wireless On or Wireless Off. How to use the Device Manager to Disable the Radio The radio can be disabled (made non-functional) from the Microsoft Windows Device Manager. NOTE: If you disabled the radio from Microsoft Windows, then you must use Microsoft Windows to turn the radio on. You cannot use a hardware switch or Intel PROSet/Wireless to enable the radio again. Windows XP style="list-style: decimal;" type=1 1. From your desktop, right-click My Computer 2. Click Properties. 3. Click Hardware. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click Network adapters. 6. Right-click the installed wireless adapter. 7. Choose Disable from the menu. 8. Click OK. Install and Uninstall the Software A Typical install includes the Wireless LAN adapter driver, the Intel PROSet/Wireless software and the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. NOTE: If you plan to use Novell(R) Client(TM) for Windows, it should be installed prior to installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, you should remove it prior to installation of Novell Client for Windows. The follow features are installed during a Custom installation:

l Administrator Toolkit l WMI Support l Single Sign On Pre-logon/Common Connect to establish a wireless connection prior to user logon to Windows To install these features, select Custom during installation. Follow the instructions below to install these features. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, see the post-installation instructions. NOTE: If you plan to use Novell(R) Client(TM) for Windows, it should be installed prior to installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, you should remove it prior to installation of Novell Client for Windows. To install the software:

1. Insert the Installation CD in your CD drive. 2. Click Install Software on the Intel PROSet/Wireless Installer screen. 3. Read the license agreement. 4. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Custom. 7. Select from the list of features to install:

WMI Support: Windows Management Instrumentation functionality allows administrators who do not have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed to manage remotely clients that do have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed. l Install: Click WMI Support. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Proceed to step 8. l Not install: Click This feature will not be available. A red X displays indicates that it is not installed. Administrator Toolkit: Installs the Administrator Tool to the Tools menu. This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles. The Administrator Tool is also used by an Information Technology department to enable or disable features within the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. l Install: Click Administrator Toolkit. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Click Next l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red X next to the option indicates that it and proceed to step 8. is not installed. Single Sign On: Installs the Single Sign On Pre-Login Connect feature.This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles with the Administrator Tool. The Fast User Switching and the Windows XP Welcome Screen are disabled when Single Sign On support is installed. Single Sign On is targeted to the enterprise environment where users log on to their computer with a user name, password, and typically a domain. Fast User Switching does not support domain log on. NOTE: Windows Fast User Switching is enabled by default if you use Windows XP Home Edition. It is targeted for the home user. Fast User Switching is also available on Windows XP Professional if you install it on a stand-alone or workgroup-connected computer. If a computer running Windows XP Professional is added to a domain, then Fast User Switching option is not available. Pre-logon/Common Connect: A Pre-logon/Common profile is active once a user logs onto the computer. l Install: Click Pre-logon/Common Connect. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red X displays indicates that it is not to Click Next and proceed to step 8. installed. 8. Click Install. The installed components are listed after the software is installed on your computer. 9. Click OK. NOTE: When Pre-logon/Common Connect is installed, you are asked to reboot after installation of the software. Add Post-Installation Features If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, follow the instructions below to add the Administrator Tool and Pre-logon/

Common Connect:

1. Click Start Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. 2. Click Change/Remove. 3. Click Modify. 4. Click Next. 5. Click the red X next to any of the features that are not currently installed. Administrator Toolkit. 6. Click Install this feature and any selected subfeatures. 7. Click Modify. After installation, the feature is listed as Installed on the Intel PROSet/Wireless Installer feature list. 8. Click OK. Uninstall Intel PROSet/Wireless To uninstall Intel PROSet/Wireless:

1. Click Start Settings Control Panel Add or Remove Programs. 2. Click Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. 3. Click Change/Remove. 4. Click Remove. 5. Click Next. 6. When prompted, determine what you would like to do with your current profiles and settings:

You have chosen to completely remove the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. Select what to do with your current profiles and settings:

l Do not save my profiles and settings. Select to completely remove all of your current profiles and settings. If you reinstall the software, the profiles and settings are no longer available. l Save my profiles and settings in the current format (Intel PROSet/Wireless 10.x). Select to save your current profiles and settings. If you reinstall the software, your current profiles and settings are available. l Convert and save my profiles and settings in Intel PROSet/Wireless 9.x format. If you need to revert to a previous version of Intel PROSet/Wireless software, select to save your settings. After you have reinstalled the software, your current profiles and settings are available. NOTE: Only settings applicable to the prior version of the software are available. 7. Make a selection and click OK. 8. After the software is removed, click Yes to restart your computer. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Connect to a Network Connect to a Wireless Network First Time Connection Other Wireless Managers Connect to a Wireless Network You can connect to a wireless network with one of the following methods. l Automatic Connection: If an existing profile matches an available network, you are automatically connected to that wireless network. l Configure a new profile: Select a wireless network from the list of wireless networks in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Click Connect. If you successfully connect, a profile is created in the Profiles list for future use. l Connect to a profile in the Profiles list: You can select a profile from the Profiles list. To activate it, click Connect. This allows you to connect to a network that is lower in the list (if it is available). l Right-click the Taskbar icon located in the lower right corner of your Windows Desktop. Right-click Connect to Profiles. A list of previously configured profiles is listed. Select a profile. First Time Connection Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically detects wireless networks that are within range of your wireless adapter. When a network is found, a desktop alert notification displays:

Wireless networks found. See Taskbar Icons for more information. 1. Double-click the desktop alert to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select a network from the wireless networks list. 3. Click Connect. If the network does not require security authentication, a desktop alert notifies you that you are connected to the network. Refer to Intel PROSet/

Wireless Main Window and Taskbar for more information about the taskbar menu and icons. If you need to add security authentication:

1. The Create Wireless Profile General Settings opens and guides you through the configuration process. 2. Specify a Profile Name. The Profile Name is your name for this network. It can be anything that helps you identify this network. For example, My Home Network, Coffee Shop on A Street. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Contains the network identifier name. 4. Click Next. The Security Settings attempts to detect the network settings of this network. m If a pre-shared key (PSK) or WEP password are required, you are prompted to enter this information prior to connection. Click Advanced to change or edit the PSK or other security settings. For information on key and passwords, see Network Keys. m If you need to add security settings, click Next to add the required security settings. Refer to Security Overview for more information. 5. Click OK to connect to the wireless network. If you ignore the Wireless networks found desktop alert, Intel PROSet/Wireless displays a message that prompts: Do you want to connect to a wireless network?

Click Yes. The Intel PROSet/Wireless main window opens. Follow the instructions above to connect to a wireless network. In addition to the Taskbar icon, Intel PROSet/Wireless also displays connection status and available networks. Refer to Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window for more information. Other Wireless Managers If the Intel PROSet/Wireless detects another software application trying to communicate with the wireless device, you are notified of this behavior. Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration To switch from Intel PROSet/Wireless to the Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration, use either of the following methods:

l From the Taskbar Menu:

Click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi to switch to Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration. Select this option to disable Intel PROSet/Wireless as your current wireless manager. You can then configure Windows XP as your wireless manager. NOTE: Any wireless profiles created in Intel PROSet/Wireless are not visible in Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration. If you want to use your Intel wireless profiles you need to select Use Intel PROSet/

Wireless to manage Wi-Fi from the Taskbar menu. From Intel PROSet/Wireless:

From the Advanced menu, click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi in the Intel PROSet/

Wireless application. When you are finished using the Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration, you can switch back to Intel PROSet/Wireless. Click Enable Intel PROSet/Wireless on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window or click Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to manage Wi-Fi from the Taskbar menu. Third Party Wireless Software If you use software provided by a hotspot location (coffee shop, airport terminal), Intel PROSet/Wireless notifies you and then disables itself. It cannot manage the wireless device when another wireless manager communicates with the wireless device. To take advantage of the Intel PROSet/Wireless features, you want to disable or remove this software when you leave the hotspot. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Profile Management What is a Profile?

Profiles List Profiles List icons Connect to a Profile Create a New Profile Edit an Existing Profile Remove a Profile Set a Profile Password Export and Import Profiles What is a Profile?

A profile is a saved group of network settings. Profiles are displayed in the Profile List. Profiles are useful when moving from one wireless network to another. Different profiles can be configured for each wireless network. Profile settings include the network name (SSID), operating mode, and security settings. A profile is created when you connect to a wireless network. 1. Select a network from the Wireless Networks list. 2. Click Connect. 3. If the wireless network requires a WEP password or encryption key, you are prompted to enter this information prior to connection. To change the security options, click Advanced to open the Create Wireless Profile Security Settings. 4. Click OK to connect. A profile is created and added to the Profiles list. The Create Wireless Profile manager guides you through the settings required to connect with the wireless network. At completion, the profile is saved and added to the Profiles list. Since these wireless settings are saved, the next time you are within range of this wireless network you are automatically connected. Profiles List The profile list displays a list of existing profiles. When you come within range of a wireless network, Intel PROSet/Wireless scans the Profile List to see if there is a match. If a match is found, you are automatically connected to the network. Profile List Priority Arrows Use the up-arrowto move the position of a selected profile up in the profiles list. l Use the down-arrow to move the position of a selected profile down in the profiles list. Profiles List Icons The network profile status icons indicate whether the adapter is associated with a network, the type of operating mode being used, and whether security encryption is enabled. These icons display next to the profile name in the profile list. Name Profile Name Description The Profile Name is your name for this network. It can be anything that helps you identify this network. For example, My Home Network, Coffee Shop on A Street. Name of the wireless network (SSID) or computer. Network Name Connection Icons - The network profile status icons indicate the different connection states of the adapter with a wireless network, the type of operating mode being used, and if network security is being used. Blue circle: The wireless adapter is associated with an access point or computer (ad hoc mode). If a profile has 802.1x security enabled, this indicates that the wireless adapter is associated and authenticated. Indicates Network (Infrastructure) mode. Indicates Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. Indicates an Administrator profile. The wireless network uses Security encryption. Arrows Use the arrows to position profiles in a preferred order for auto-connection. l Up-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile up in the Profiles l Down-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile down in the list. Profiles list. Connect Add Remove Properties Connect the selected profile for the wireless network. Opens the Create Wireless Profile General Settings, which is used to create a new profile. Refer to Create a New Profile for more information. Remove a selected profile from the Profile List. Refer to Remove a Profile for more information. Used to edit the contents of an existing profile. You can also double-click a profile in the Profiles list to edit the profile. Refer to Edit an Existing Profile for more information. Export/Import: Imports and exports user-based profiles to and from the Profiles list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profiles list. See Import and Export Profiles for more information. Close Help?

Closes the profile management window. Provides help information for this page. Connect to a Profile When you are in range of a wireless network that has a matching profile you are automatically connected to that network. If a network with a lower priority profile is also in range you can force the connection to that lower profile. This is achieved from Intel PROSet/Wireless or from the Taskbar icon. Manually connect to a profile from Intel PROSet/Wireless:

1. Double-click the Taskbar icon to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Click Profiles to open the Profiles list. 3. Select the profile from the Profile list. 4. Click Connect. Remember that the connection is only made if the wireless network is in range. Manually connect to a profile from the Taskbar:

1. Right-click the Intel PROSet/Wireless connection Taskbar icon. 2. Click Connect to Profile. 3. Select a profile. 4. Click to start the connection. Create a New Profile Select a network from the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Create Wireless Profile manager guides you through the necessary steps to create a profile and connect to the network. During this process, the Create Wireless Profile Security Settings attempts to detect the appropriate security settings for you. To create a new profile and connect to a wireless network:

1. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, click Profiles. 2. On the Profiles list, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the wireless network name. 5. Select the Operating Mode: Network (Infrastructure) or Device to Device (ad hoc). General Settings Description Name Profile Name Description Name of the wireless network profile. When you configure a wireless network that was selected from the Wireless Networks list, the profile name is the same as the Wireless Network Name (SSID). This name can be changed to be more descriptive or customized for your personal use. Wireless Network Name (SSID) Examples: My Office Network, Bobs Home Network, ABC Company Network Name of the wireless network access point used by the wireless adapter for connection. The network name must match exactly the name of the wireless access point. It is case sensitive. When you configure a wireless network that was selected from the Wireless Networks list, the network name is taken from the wireless network list. You cannot and should not change it. If an access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID) or the wireless adapter receives a hidden network name from a stealth access point, <SSID not broadcast is displayed in the Wireless Networks list. To associate with an <SSID not broadcast network entry, a new profile must be created before connection. After connection, the

<SSID not broadcast is still displayed in the Wireless Networks list. The associated SSID profile is viewed in the Profiles list. Network (Infrastructure): Connect to an access point. An Network (Infrastructure) network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters. This connection is the type used in home networks, corporate networks, hotels, and other areas that provide access to the network and/or the internet. NOTE: Only Network (Infrastructure) is available for administrator profiles (Pre-

logon/Common, Persistent and VoIP profiles). Refer to the Administrator Tool for more information. Device to Device (ad hoc): Connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc wireless network. This type of connection is useful for connections between two or more computers only. It does not provide access to network resources or the internet. Click Advanced to access the Advanced Settings. Use the Advanced Settings to set Maintain Connection, User Name Format, Auto Connect or Auto Import options, launch an application (Start Application), set a profile password (Password Protection) or specify a certain access point address for adapter connection (Mandatory Access Point). Proceeds to the Security Settings page. Finishes creation of the new profile with the current settings. Closes the Create Wireless Profile manager and cancel any changes. Provides help information for this page. Operating Mode Advanced Next OK Cancel Help?

6. Click Advanced for the following options:

type="disc"

l Auto Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. m Auto Import: Network administrator can export a profile on another computer. m Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. m Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Start Application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. m Maintain Connection: Select to remain connected to a user profile after log off. Advanced Settings Description Use to password protect a profile and select a specific access point on a network to connect to. Click the Advanced button on the General Settings page to access this page. Name Auto Connect Description Automatic (Default): Select to have Intel PROSet/Wireless connect automatically to this profile when it is in range. Auto Import Mandatory Access Point Password Protection Start Application On Demand: Select to prevent automatic connection of a profile when the network is in range. For example, if there is a cost for a wireless connection and you did not want to connect automatically when in range. To connect to the network:

1. Select the network from the Wireless Networks list. 2. Click Connect. Allows a network administrator to easily move the selected profile to other computers. When the exported file is placed in the Wireless

\AutoImport directory on another computer, Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically imports the profile. NOTE: Auto Import is unavailable in the Advanced Settings when Administrator Profiles are configured. Forces the wireless adapter to connect to an access point that uses a specific MAC address. Type the MAC address of the access point (BSSID);

48-bit 12 hexadecimal digits. For example, 00:06:25:0E:9D:84. This feature is not available when ad hoc operating mode is used. Clear: Clear current address. 1. Password protect this profile (maximum 10 characters):

Select to enable a password for the profile. The default setting is cleared for no profile password. 2. Password: Enter a password. The entered password characters display as asterisks. 3. Confirm New Password: Reenter the password. NOTE: If the administrator or you do not know the password, there is no process available to reset the password. NOTE: Unavailable for Administrator Profiles. Automatically starts a batch file, executable file, or script whenever you connect to the profile. For example, start a Virtual Private Network (VPN) session automatically whenever you connect to a wireless network. 1. Click Enable Start Application. 2. Enter the name of the program that you want to start or click Browse to locate the file on your hard disk. C:\Program Files

\myprogram\myVPNfile.exe. 3. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. Maintain Connection NOTE: Unavailable for Administrator Profiles. The Maintain Connection option maintains the wireless connection with a user profile after log off. If the Maintain Connection option is selected and a persistent profile exists, the persistent profile will not be applied at logoff. It will be applied only if the connection with this profile is lost. NOTE: This option may be used with Nortel VPN client when it is configured to Logoff on Connect. Close and save the settings. Close and cancel any changes. Help information for this page. OK Cancel Help?

7. From the General Settings, click Next to open the Security Settings. 8. Select either Personal or Enterprise Security to select the Network Authentication and Data Encryption options. Enter the encryption key settings and configure the 802.1x settings as required. 9. Click OK when you have completed the profile settings. To change or verify the profile settings, click Back. 10. If you are not currently connected to a network, Intel PROSet/Wireless detects that a new profile has been added and automatically attempts to connect to this new profile. 11. If you want to manually connect to this profile, click Connect. The connection icon displays the current connection status. The network name, transmit and receive speeds, and signal quality are also displayed. Edit an Existing Profile To edit an existing profile:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile to edit in the Profiles list. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties General Settings. 4. Click Next and Back to navigate through the Wireless Profile Properties' General and Security Settings:

m General Settings. Refer to General Settings for more information. m Security Settings. Refer to Security Settings for more information. 5. Click OK to save the current settings and exit. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes. Remove a Profile To remove a profile:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Remove. You are notified that Selected profiles will be permanently removed. Do you want to continue?

4. Click Yes. The profile is removed from the Profiles list. If you are still connected to the network:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Remove. You are notified that Selected profiles will be permanently removed. Do you 4. Click Yes. You are notified that <profile name is active and will be permanently removed. Do want to continue?

you want to continue?

5. Click Yes. The profile is removed from the Profiles list. NOTE: If the profile is protected by a password, you cannot remove or edit the profile settings without entering the password. If the administrator or you do not know the password, there is no process available to reset the password. Set a Profile Password To password protect an existing profile:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. 4. Click Advanced to open the Advanced Settings. 5. Click Password Protection to open the Password Protection settings. 6. Click Password protect this profile (maximum 10 characters) 7. Password: Type the password. 8. Confirm Password: Reenter the password. 9. Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 10. Click OK to return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Export or Import Profiles Allows you to export and import user-based profiles to and from the Profiles list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profiles list. NOTE: To export Administrator profiles, refer to Administrator Packages for more information. Export Profiles from the Profiles List 1. Select individual or multiple profiles from the list. 2. Select Export to export one or more profiles from the Profiles list. 3. Select the destination folder. Click Browse to search your hard disk for the destination directory. The C:\ drive is the default directory. 4. Click OK to export the selected profile. You are notified: Successfully exported selected profiles to the destination folder: C:\. To select multiple profiles:

1. Use your mouse to highlight a profile. 2. Press Ctrl. 3. Click each profile that you want selected. Follow the instructions from Step 2 above to export multiple profiles. Import Profiles into the Profiles List To import profiles manually:

1. Click Import on the Profiles list. 2. Select the profile files to import. 3. Click Import. 4. You are notified that the profile has been successfully imported. An administrator can set profiles to be imported automatically into the Profiles list. Intel PROSet/Wireless monitors the import folder on your hard disk for new profile files. Only profiles that have been enabled through Enable Auto-Import in the Advanced Settings are automatically imported. If a profile of the same name already exists in the Profiles List, you are notified to either reject the imported profile or accept it. If accepted, the existing profile is replaced. All imported user-based profiles are placed at the bottom of the Profiles List. Password Protected Profiles Import and export password-protected user-based profiles automatically to remote systems. If a profile is password protected, the assigned password must be entered before it can be edited. Refer to Set a Profile Password for more information. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Set Up Profile Security Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software Personal Security Personal Security Settings Set up Data Encryption and Authentication l Set up a Client with Open Authentication and No Data Encryption (None) l Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption l Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP) Security Settings l Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP) Security Settings Enterprise Security Enterprise Security Settings l Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks Network Authentication l Set up a Client with Shared Network Authentication l Set up a Client with WPA-Personal or WPA2 Personal Network Authentication l Set up a Client with WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise Network Authentication 802.1x Authentication Types l Set up a Client with WEP Data Encryption and EAP-SIM Network Authentication l Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication l Set up a Client with TTLS Network Authentication l Set up a Client with PEAP Network Authentication l Set up a Client with LEAP Network Authentication l Set up a Client with EAP-FAST Network Authentication Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software The following sections describe how to use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless to set up the required security settings for your wireless adapter. Refer to Personal Security. It also provides information about how to configure advanced security settings for your wireless adapter. This requires information from a systems administrator (corporate environment) or advanced security settings on your access point (for home users). Refer to Enterprise Security. For general information about security settings, refer to Security Overview. Personal Security Use Personal Security if you are a home or small business user who can use a variety of simple security procedures to protect your wireless connection. Select from the list of security settings that do not require extensive infrastructure setup for your wireless network. A RADIUS or AAA server is not required. l Review the Set up Data Encryption and Authentication information to learn about the different security types. l To add or change the required security settings, click Security Settings for information to set security for the selected wireless network. l See Profile Management for a description of when to use the Create Wireless Profile manager. l See Security Overview for more information about the different security options for wireless networks. l If you want to verify the security settings, select a wireless network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Network Properties to review the operating mode, authentication level and data encryption. l See Enterprise Security to set 802.1x authentication security. Personal Security Settings Personal Security Settings Description Name Personal Security Setting Select to open the Personal Security settings. The security settings that are available are dependent on the Operating Mode selected in the Create Wireless Profile Security Settings. Device to Device (ad hoc): In device to device mode, also called ad hoc mode, wireless computers send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use ad hoc mode to network multiple computers in a home or small office, or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. NOTE: Device to Device (ad hoc) networks are identified with a notebook image (

Network

) in the Wireless Networks and Profiles list and Network (Infrastructure): An Network (Infrastructure) network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. At least one access point should also have a wired connection. For home users, this is usually a broadband or cable network NOTE: Network (Infrastructure) networks are identified with an access point image (

) in the Wireless Networks and Profiles list. Security Settings If you configure a profile for a Device to Device (ad hoc) network, select one of the following data encryption settings:

l None: No authentication required. l WEP-64 bit or WEP-128 bit: A network key or password is used for encryption. If you configure an profile for an Infrastructure network, select:

l None: No authentication required. l WEP-64 bit or WEP-128 bit: A network key or password is used for encryption. l WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP): WPA-Personal utilizes the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption. l WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP): WPA-Personal utilizes a new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard, AES-CCMP. Advanced Select to access the Advanced Settings to configure the following options:

l Auto Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. l Auto Import: Network administrator can export a profile on another computer. l Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. l Start Application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. Back OK Cancel Help?

View the prior page in the Create Wireless Profile manager. Closes the Create Wireless Profile manager and saves the profile. Closes the Create Wireless Profile manager and cancels any changes made. Provides the help information for the current page. Set up Data Encryption and Authentication In a home wireless network, you can use a variety of simple security procedures to protect your wireless connection. These include:

l Enable Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) l Change your password l Change the network name (SSID) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) encryption provides protection for your data on the network. WPA uses an encryption key called a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) to encrypt data before transmission. Enter the same password in all of the computers and access points in your home or small business network. Only devices that use the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. The password automatically initiates the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for the data encryption process. Network Keys WEP encryption provides two levels of security:

l 64-bit key (sometimes referred to as 40-bit) l 128-bit key (also known as 104-bit) For improved security, use a 128-bit key. If you use encryption, all wireless devices on your wireless network must use the same encryption keys. You can create the key yourself and specify the key length (64- or 128-bit) and key index (the location that a specific key is stored). The greater the key length, the more secure the key. Key Length: 64-bit Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. Hex key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. Key Length: 128-bit Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. Hex key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. With 802.11, a wireless station can be configured with up to four keys (the key index values are 1, 2, 3, and 4). When an access point or a wireless station transmits an encrypted message that uses a key stored in a specific key index, the transmitted message indicates the key index that was used to encrypt the message body. The receiving access point or wireless station can then retrieve the key that is stored at the key index and use it to decode the encrypted message body. Set up a Client with Open Authentication and No Data Encryption

(None) In device to device mode, also called ad hoc mode, wireless computers send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use ad hoc mode to network multiple computers in a home or small office, or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. On the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window, select one of the following methods to connect to a device to device network:

l Double-click an ad hoc network in the Wireless Networks list. l Select a network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. l Create a device to device (ad hoc) network profile as described below. To create a profile for a wireless network connection with no encryption:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Device to Device (ad hoc). 6. Click Next. 7. Click Personal Security to open the Security Settings. Data Encryption:The default setting is None, which indicates that there is no security on this wireless network. 8. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list and connects to the wireless network. Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption When WEP data encryption is enabled, a network key or password is used for encryption. You must enter the key and specify the length (64- or 128-bit) and key index (the location that a specific key is stored). The more complex the key (mixed letters and numbers), the more secure the key. To add a network key to a device to device network connection:

1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, double-click a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list or select the network and click Connect. When connected, a profile is added to the Profiles list. 2. Click Profiles to access the Profiles list. Select the network that you connected to in Step 1. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Device to Device (ad hoc) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Click Personal Security. 6. Security Settings: The default setting is None, which indicates that there is no security on this wireless network. To add a password or network key:

1. Security Settings: Select either WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit to configure WEP data encryption with a 64- or 128-bit key. When WEP encryption is enabled on a device, the WEP key is used to verify access to the network. If the wireless device does not have the correct WEP key, even though authentication is successful, the device is unable to transmit data. 2. Password: Enter the Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key). Name Password Description Enter the Wireless Security Password (Pass phrase) or Encryption Key

(WEP key). Pass phrase (64-bit ) Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. WEP key (64-bit) Pass phrase (128-bit) Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. WEP key (128-bit) Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. 2. To add more than one password:

m Select the Key Index number: 1, 2, 3, or 4. m Enter the Wireless Security Password. m Select another Key Index number. m Enter another Wireless Security Password. 3. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP) Security Settings WPA Personal Mode requires manual configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK) on the access point and clients. This PSK authenticates a user's password or identifying code, on both the client station and the access point. An authentication server is not needed. WPA Personal Mode is targeted to home and small business environments. WPA2 is the second generation of WPA security that provides enterprise and consumer wireless users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. WPA2 provides a stronger encryption mechanism through Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), which is a requirement for some corporate and government users. To configure a profile with WPA-Personal network authentication and TKIP data encryption:

1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, double-click an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list or select the network and click Connect. 2. Click Profiles to access the Profiles list. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Network (Infrastructure) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Security Settings: Select WPA-Personal (TKIP) to provide security to a small business network or home environment. A password, called a pre-shared key (PSK), is used. The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. If your wireless access point or router supports WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. The same password entered in the access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. 6. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key): Enter a text phrase with eight to 63 characters. Verify that the network key matches the password in the wireless access point. 7. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP) Security Settings Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. For a home user or small business, WPA-Personal utilizes either Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) or Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). To configure a profile with WPA2-Personal network authentication and AES-CCMP data encryption:

1. On the Profile page, select a profile. 2. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Network (Infrastructure) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 3. Click Next. The Security Settings page opens. 4. Security Settings: Select WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) to provide this level of security in the small network or home environment. It uses a password also called a pre-shared key (PSK). The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. Choose AES-CCMP as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. If your Wireless access point or router supports WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The same password entered into access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. Some security solutions may not be supported by your computer's operating system. You may require additional software or hardware as well as wireless LAN infrastructure support. Contact your computer manufacturer for details. Set Password:

1. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key). Enter a text phrase (length is between eight and 63 characters). Verify that the network key used matches the wireless access point key. 2. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Back to Top Back to Contents Enterprise Security From the Security Settings page you can enter the required security settings for the selected wireless network. Use Enterprise Security if your network environment requires 802.1x authentication. l 802.1x authentication methods, include passwords, certificates and smart cards. l 802.1x authentication types are: EAP-SIM, LEAP, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST. l See Profile Management for a description of when the Create Wireless Profile manager is launched. l See Security Overview for more information on the different security options for wireless networks. l See Personal Security to set basic WEP or WPA security in a non-enterprise environment (home, small business). Enterprise Security Settings Enterprise Security Settings Description Name Enterprise Security Network Authentication Setting Select to open the Enterprise Security settings. The security settings that are available are dependent on the Operating Mode selected: Device to Device (ad hoc) or Network (Infrastructure). If you configure a Device to Device (ad hoc) profile, the default is Open authentication. If you configure an Infrastructure profile, select:

l Open authentication: Any wireless station can request authentication. l Shared authentication: Uses an encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. l WPA-Personal or WPA2 Personal: Uses a password also called a pre-shared key (PSK). l WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise: Use on enterprise networks with an 802.1x RADIUS server. Data Encryption Click to open the following data encryption types:

l None: No encryption. l WEP l CKIP l TKIP l AES-CCMP Enable 802.1x (Authentication Type) Click to open the following 802.11x authentication types:

l EAP-SIM l TLS l TTLS l PEAP l LEAP l EAP-FAST Cisco Options Click to view the Cisco Compatible Extensions. Advanced button NOTE: Cisco Compatible Extensions are automatically enabled for CKIP and LEAP profiles. Select to access the Advanced Settings to configure the following options:

l Auto Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. l Auto Import: Network administrator can export a profile on another computer. l Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. l Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Start Application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. l Maintain Connection: Select to maintain the wireless connection with a user profile after log off. User Credentials A profile configured for TTLS, PEAP, or EAP-FAST authentication requires one of the following log on authentication methods:

Use Windows logon: The 802.1x credentials match your Windows user name and password. Before connection, you are prompted for your Windows logon credentials. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-logon/Common Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. NOTE: For Leap profiles, this option is listed as Use Windows logon user name and password. Prompt each time I connect: Prompt for your user name and password every time you log onto the wireless network. NOTE: For Leap profiles, this option is listed as Prompt for the user name and password. Use the following: Use your saved credentials to log onto the network. l User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the administrator prior to client authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol operating over the TLS tunnel. This identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been established. l Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its sub-

domains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). l Password: Specifies the user password. The password characters appear as asterisks. This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. l Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. NOTE: For Leap profiles, this option is listed as Use the following user name and password. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods:

Validate Server Certificate: Select to verify the server certificate. Certificate Issuer: The server certificate received during TLS message exchange must be issued by this certificate authority

(CA). Trusted intermediate certificate authorities and root authorities whose certificates exist in the system store are available for selection. If Any Trusted CA is selected, any CA in the list is acceptable. Click Any Trusted CA as the default or select a certificate issuer from the list. Specify Server or Certificate Name: Enter the server name. The server name or domain to which the server belongs, depends on which of the two options below has been selected. l Server name must match the specified entry exactly:

When selected, the server name must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the complete domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). l Domain name must end with the specified entry: When selected, the server name identifies a domain, and the certificate must have a server name that belongs to this domain or to one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans. com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. To obtain a certificate for TLS authentication, select one of the following:

Use my smart card: Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. Use the certificate issued to this computer: Selects a certificate that resides in the machine store. Use a user certificate on this computer: Click Select to choose a certificate that resides on this computer. NOTE: Intel PROSet/Wireless supports machine certificates. However, they are not displayed in the certificate listings. Notes about Certificates: The specified identity should match the Issued to identity in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. Use the same user name you used to log in when the certificate was installed. View the prior page in the Create Wireless Profile manager. View the next page in the Create Wireless Profile manager. If more security information is required then the next Step of the Security page is displayed. Closes the Create Wireless Profile manager and saves the profile. Closes the Create Wireless Profile manager and cancels any changes made. Provides the help information for the current page. Server Options Certificate Options Back Next OK Cancel Help?

Enterprise Security Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. Each access point must have a wired connection to a wireless network. Set up a Client with WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise Network Authentication WPA2-Enterprise requires an authentication server. l WPA-Enterprise: A wireless security method that provides strong data protection for multiple users and large managed networks. It uses the 802.1X authentication framework with TKIP encryption and prevents unauthorized network access by verifying network users through an authentication server. l WPA2-Enterprise: The follow-on wireless security method to WPA that provides stronger data protection for multiple users and large managed networks. It prevents unauthorized network access by verifying network users through an authentication server. NOTE: WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not interoperable. To add a profile that uses WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise authentication:

1. Obtain a user name and password on the RADIUS server from your administrator. 2. Certain Authentication Types require that obtain and install a client certificate. Refer to Setting up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your administrator. 3. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 4. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 5. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 6. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 7. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 8. Click Next. 9. Select Enterprise Security. 10. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 11. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 12. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 13. Authentication Type: Select one of the following: EAP-SIM, LEAP, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST. Set up a Client with WEP Data Encryption and EAP-SIM Network Authentication EAP-SIM uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. EAP-SIM requires you to enter a user verification code, or Personal Identification Number

(PIN), for communication with the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) based digital cellular networks. To add a profile with EAP-SIM authentication:

1. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 2. Profile Name: Enter a profile name. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 5. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 6. Select Enterprise Security. 7. Network Authentication: Select Open (Recommended). 8. Data Encryption: Select WEP. 9. Click Enable 802.1x. 10. Authentication type: Select EAP-SIM. EAP-SIM authentication can be used with:

l Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise l Data Encryption types: None, WEP, TKIP, AES-CCMP and CKIP EAP-SIM User (optional) 1. Specify user name (identity): Click to specify the user name. m User Name: Enter the user name assigned to the SIM card. 2. Click OK. Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. Transport Layer Security

(TLS) authentication is a two-way authentication method that exclusively uses digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. To add a profile with TLS authentication:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Type the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select AES-CCMP (Recommended). 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select TLS to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: TLS User 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate: Use my smart card, Use the certificate issued to this computer, or Use a user certificate on this computer. 3. Click Next to open the TLS Server settings. Step 2 of 2: TLS Server Select one of the following:

1. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods: Validate Server Certificate or Specify Server or Certificate Name. 2. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list. 3. Click the new profile at the end of the Profiles list. Use the up and down arrows to change the priority of the new profile. 4. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. 5. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. Set up a Client with TTLS Network Authentication TTLS authentication: These settings define the protocol and credentials used to authenticate a user. The client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols (for example, MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation). The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. The following example describes how to use WPA with AES-

CCMP encryption with TTLS authentication. To set up a client with TTLS Network Authentication:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select TTLS to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: TTLS User 1. Authentication Protocol: This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the TTLS tunnel. The protocols are: PAP (Default), CHAP, MD5, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP-V2. See Security Overview for more information. 2. User Credentials: User Credentials: For PAP, CHAP, MD5, MS-CHAP, and MS-CHAP-V2 protocols, select one of these authentication methods: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect, or Use the following. 3. Roaming Identity: A Roaming Identity may be populated in this field or you can use %domain%\%

username% as the default format for entering a roaming identity. When 802.1x Microsoft IAS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the server authenticates the device using the Roaming Identity from Intel PROSet/Wireless software, and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for the Roaming Identity. For all other authentication servers, the Roaming Identity is optional. Therefore, it is recommended to use the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm) for the Roaming Identity rather than a true identity. 4. Click Next to access the TTLS Server settings. Step 2 of 2: TTLS Server 1. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods: Validate Server Certificate or Specify Server or Certificate Name. 2. Click OK to save the setting and close the page. Set up a Client with PEAP Network Authentication PEAP authentication: PEAP settings are required for the authentication of the client to the authentication server. The client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between client and server. The client can use another EAP mechanism (for example, Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol

(MS-CHAP) Version 2), over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. The following example describes how to use WPA with AES-CCMP or TKIP encryption with PEAP authentication. To set up a client with PEAP Authentication:

Obtain and install a client certificate. Refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your administrator. 1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select PEAP to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: PEAP User PEAP relies on Transport Layer Security (TLS) to allow unencrypted authentication types (for example, EAP-

Generic Token Card (GTC) and One-Time Password (OTP) support). 1. Authentication Protocol: Select either GTC, MS-CHAP-V2 (Default), or TLS. Refer to Authentication Protocols. 2. User Credentials: User Credentials: Select one of the following: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect, or Use the following. 3. Roaming Identity: A Roaming Identity may be populated in this field or you can use %domain%\%

username% as the default format for entering a roaming identity. When 802.1x Microsoft IAS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the server authenticates the device using the Roaming Identity from Intel PROSet/Wireless software, and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for the Roaming Identity. For all other authentication servers, the Roaming Identity is optional. Therefore, it is recommended to use the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm) for the Roaming Identity rather than a true identity. Configure Roaming Identity to support multiple users:

If you use a Pre-logon/Common profile that requires the roaming identity to be based on the Windows logon credentials, the creator of the profile can add a roaming identity that uses %

username% and %domain%. The roaming identity is parsed and the appropriate log on information is substituted for the keywords. This allows maximum flexibility in configuring the roaming identity while allowing multiple users to share the profile. Please refer to your authentication server user guide for directions about how to format a suitable roaming identity. Possible formats are:

%domain%\%username%

%username%@%domain%

%username%@%domain%.com

%username%@mynetwork.com If Roaming Identity is cleared, %domain%\%username% is the default. Notes about the credentials: This user name and domain must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the administrator prior to client authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol operating over the TLS tunnel. This user identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been verified and established. Authentication Protocols: This parameter specifies the authentication protocols that can operate over the TTLS tunnel. Below are instructions on how to configure a profile that uses PEAP authentication with GTC, MS-CHAP-V2 (Default), or TLS authentication protocols. Generic Token Card (GTC) To configure a one-time password:

1. Authentication Protocol: Select GTC (Generic Token Card). 2. User Credentials: Select Prompt each time I connect. 3. On connection prompt for: Select one of the following:

Name Static Password One-time password (OTP) Obtain the password from a hardware token device. PIN (Soft Token) Description On connection, enter the user credentials. Obtain the password from a soft token program. 5. Click OK. 6. Select the profile on the Wireless Networks list. 7. Click Connect. When prompted, enter the user name, domain and one-time password (OTP). 8. Click OK. You are asked to verify your log in information. NOTE: The Prompt each time I connect option is unavailable if an Administrator has cleared the Cache Credentials setting in the the Administrator Tool. Refer to Administrator Settings for more information. MS-CHAP-V2. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the PEAP tunnel. 1. User Credentials: Select one of the following options: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect, or Use the following. 2. Click Next to open the PEAP Server settings. TLS: Transport Layer Security authentication is a two-way authentication method that exclusively uses digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate: Use my smart card, Use the certificate issued to this computer, or Use a user certificate on this computer. 3. Click Next to open the PEAP Server settings. Step 2 of 2: PEAP Server 1. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods: Validate Server Certificate or Specify Server or Certificate Name. 2. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list. 3. Click the new profile at the end of the Profiles list. Use the up and down arrows to change the priority of the new profile. 4. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. If you did not select Use Windows logon on the Security Settings page and also did not configure user credentials, no credentials are saved for this profile. Please enter your credentials to authenticate to the network. 5. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. PEAP-TLS Certificate Auto Enrollment In the Application Settings, select Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless TLS Certificate Rejected Warning, if you want a warning issued when a PEAP-TLS certificate is rejected. When a certificate has an invalid field expiration date, you are notified that you must take one of the following actions: A potential authentication problem for profile <profile name has been detected. The expiration date in the associated certificate may be invalid. Choose one of the following options:

Control Continue with current parameters. Update certificate manually. Update certificate automatically based on the certificates in the local store. Log off to obtain certificate during logon process

(this does not update the profile and only applies to certificates configured for auto enrollment). Auto enrollment Do not show this message again. Description Continue with the current certificate. The Select Certificate page opens for you to choose another certificate. This option is enabled only when the local store holds one or more certificates for which the "issued to" and "issued by" fields match the current certificate and for which the

"expiration date" has not expired. If you choose this option, the application selects the first valid certificate. Logs off the user, who must obtain a proper certificate during the next logon process. The profile must be updated to select the new certificate. You are notified to: Please wait while the system is trying to obtain the certificate automatically. Click Cancel to end the certificate retrieval. A user is able to avoid this step in subsequent sessions. The choice selected is remembered for future sessions. Set up a Client with LEAP Network Authentication Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an 802.1X authentication type that supports strong mutual authentication between the client and a RADIUS server. The LEAP profiles settings include LEAP, CKIP with Rogue AP detection integration. To set up a client with LEAP Authentication:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add. The Create Wireless Profile General Settings opens. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select LEAP to be used with this connection. 12. Click Cisco Options. 13. Click Enable Cisco Compatible Extensions to enable Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) security (Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM), Enable Radio Management Support, Enable Mixed Cells Mode.). 14. Click Enable Radio Management Support. Use Radio Management to detect rogue access points. 15. Click OK to return to the Security Settings. LEAP User:

1. Select one of the following authentication methods:

m Select one of the following authentication methods: Use Windows logon user name and password, Prompt for the user name and password, or Use the following user name and password. 2. Click OK to save the setting and close the page. Cisco Compatible Extensions Options Cisco Options: Use to enable or disable Radio Management and Mixed Cells Mode or Allow Fast Roaming

(CCKM). NOTE: Cisco Compatible Extensions are automatically enabled for CKIP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profiles. To override this behavior, select or clear options on this page. l Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM): Select to enable the client wireless adapter for fast-secure roaming. When a wireless LAN is configured for fast reconnection, an EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, PEAP-GTC, PEAP-

MSCHAPv2 or LEAP-enabled client device can roam from one access point to another without involving the main server. Use Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), an access point configured to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS), to take the place of the RADIUS server and authenticate the client without perceptible delay in voice or other time-sensitive applications. Enable Cisco Compatible Options: Select to enable Cisco Compatible Extensions for this wireless connection profile. l Enable Radio Management Support: Select to have your wireless adapter provide radio management to the Cisco infrastructure. If the Cisco Radio Management utility is used on the infrastructure, it configures radio parameters, detects interference and rogue access points. Default setting is selected. l Enable Mixed Cells Mode: Select to allow the wireless adapter to communicate with mixed cells. A mixed cell is a wireless network in which there are both devices that use WEP and devices that do not. Refer to Mixed Cells Mode for more information. The default setting is cleared. Set up a Client with EAP-FAST Network Authentication In Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 3 (CCXv3), Cisco added support for EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling), which uses protected access credentials

(PACs) to establish an authenticated tunnel between a client and a server. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 (CCXv4) improves the provisioning methods for enhanced security and provides innovations for enhanced security, mobility, quality of service, and network management. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 3 (CCXv3) To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication with Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 3 (CCXv3):

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. NOTE: If CCXv4 Application Setting was not installed through an Administrator Package, only EAP-

FAST User Settings are available for configuration. Refer to EAP-FAST User Settings. Step 1 of 2: EAP-FAST Provisioning 1. Click Disable EAP-FAST Enhancements (CCXv4) to allow provisioning inside a server-

unauthenticated TLS tunnel (Unauthenticated-TLS-Server Provisioning Mode). 2. Click Select server to view any unauthenticated PACs that have already been provisioned and reside on this computer. NOTE: If the provisioned PAC is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. To import a PAC:

l Click Select server to open the Protected Access Credentials (PAC) list. l Click Import to import a PAC that resides on this computer or a server. l Select the PAC and click Open. l Enter the PAC password (optional). l Click OK to close this page. The selected PAC is added to PAC list. 3. Click Next to select the credential retrieval method or click OK to save the EAP-FAST settings and return to the Profiles list. The PAC is used for this wireless profile. Step 2 of 2: EAP-FAST Additional Information To perform client authentication in the established tunnel, a client sends a user name and password to authenticate and establish client authorization policy. 1. Click User Credentials to select one of the following credentials retrieval method: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect , or Use the following. 2. Click OK to save the settings and close the page. Server verification is not required. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 (CCXv4) To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication with Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 4 (CCXv4):

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Select Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Data Encryption: Select AES-CCMP. 11. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 12. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 3: EAP-FAST Provisioning With CCXv4, EAP-FAST supports two modes for provisioning:

l Server-Authenticated Mode: Provisioning inside a server authenticated TLS tunnel. l Server-Unauthenticated Mode: Provisioning inside an unauthenticated TLS tunnel. NOTE: Server-Authenticated Mode provides significant security advantages over Server-

Unauthenticated Mode even when EAP-MSCHAPv2 is being used as an inner method. This mode protects the EAP-MSCHAPv2 exchanges from potential Man-in-the-Middle attacks by verifying the servers authenticity before exchanging MSCHAPv2. Therefore, Server-Authenticated Mode is preferred whenever it is possible. EAP-FAST peer must use Server-Authenticated Mode whenever a certificate or public key is available to authenticate the server and ensure the best security practices. Provisioning of Protected Access Credentials (PAC):

EAP-FAST uses a PAC key to protect the user credentials that are exchanged. All EAP-FAST authenticators are identified by an authority identity (A-ID). The local authenticator sends its A-ID to an authenticating client, and the client checks its database for a matching A-ID. If the client does not recognize the A-ID, it requests a new PAC. NOTE: If the provisioned Protected Access Credential (PAC) is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. 1. Verify that Disable EAP-FAST Enhancements (CCXv4) is not selected. Allow unauthenticated provisioning and Allow authenticated provisioning are selected by default. Once a PAC is selected from the Default Server, you can deselect any of these provisioning methods. 2. Default Server: None is selected as the default. Click Select Server to select a PAC from the default PAC authority server or select a server from the Server group list. The EAP-FAST Default Server (PAC Authority) selection page opens. NOTE: Server groups are only listed if you have installed an Administrator Package that contains EAP-FAST Authority ID (A-ID) Group settings. PAC distribution can also be completed manually (out-of-band). Manual provisioning enables you to create a PAC for a user on an ACS server and then import it into a user's computer. A PAC file can be protected with a password, which the user needs to enter during a PAC import. To import a PAC:

1. Click Import to import a PAC from the PAC server. 2. Click Open. 3. Enter the PAC password. (Optional) 4. Click OK closes this page. The selected PAC is used for this wireless profile. EAP-FAST CCXv4 enables support for the provisioning of other credentials beyond the PAC currently provisioned for tunnel establishment. The credential types supported include trusted CA certificate, machine credentials for machine authentication, and temporary user credentials used to bypass user authentication. Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) 1. Click Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) 2. Click Identity Protection when the tunnel is protected. 3. Select one of the following:

m Use a user certificate on this computer. Click Select to choose the user certificate. Click OK. Proceed to Step 4. m Use the certificate issued to this computer. Proceed to Step 5. m Use my smart card. Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. Proceed to Step 5. 4. User Name: Enter the user name assigned to the user certificate. 5. Click Next. Step 2 of 3: EAP-FAST Additional Information If you selected Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) and Use a user certificate on this computer, click Next (no roaming identity is required) and proceed to Step 3 to configure EAP-FAST Server certificate settings. If you do not need to configure EAP-FAST server settings, click OK to save your settings and return to the Profiles page. If you selected to use a smart card, add the roaming identity, if required. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Profiles page. If you did not select Use a certificate (TLS Authentication), click Next to select an Authentication Protocol. CCXv4 permits additional credentials or TLS cipher suites to establish the tunnel. Authentication Protocol: Select either GTC, or MS-CHAP-V2 (Default). Generic Token Card (GTC) GTC may be used with Server-Authenticated Mode . This enable peers using other user databases as Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and one-time password (OTP) technology to be provisioned in-

band. However, the replacement may only be achieved when used with the TLS cipher suites that ensure server authentication. To configure a one-time password:

1. Authentication Protocol: Select GTC (Generic Token Card). 2. User Credentials: Select Prompt each time I connect. 3. On connection prompt for: Select one of the following:

Name Static Password One-time password (OTP) Obtain the password from a hardware token device. PIN (Soft Token) Description On connection, enter the user credentials. Obtain the password from a soft token program. 1. Click OK. 2. Select the profile on the Wireless Networks list. 3. Click Connect. When prompted, enter the user name, domain and one-time password (OTP). 4. Click OK. MS-CHAP-V2. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the PEAP tunnel. 1. Select the user credentials: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect, or Use the following. 2. Roaming Identity: A Roaming Identity may be populated in this field or you can use %domain%\%

username% as the default format for entering a roaming identity. When 802.1x Microsoft IAS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the server authenticates the device using the Roaming Identity from Intel PROSet/Wireless software, and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for the Roaming Identity. For all other authentication servers, the Roaming Identity is optional. Therefore, it is recommended to use the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm) for the Roaming Identity rather than a true identity. Step 3 of 3: EAP-FAST Server Authenticated-TLS-Server Provisioning Mode is supported using a trusted CA certificate, a self-signed server certificate, or server public keys and GTC as the inner EAP method. 1. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods: Validate Server Certificate or Specify Server or Certificate Name. 2. Click OK to close the security settings. EAP-FAST User Settings NOTE: If an Administrator Package was installed on a user's computer that did not apply the Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 Application Setting, only EAP-FAST User settings are available for configuration. To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication:

1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:

m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. 12. Click Cisco Options to select Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM) which enables the client wireless adapter for fast secure roaming. EAP-FAST User:

Select the credential retrieval method:

1. Select the user credentials: Use Windows logon, Prompt each time I connect, or Use the following. 2. Allow automatic provisioning of Protected Access Credentials (PAC):

EAP-FAST uses a PAC key to protect the user credentials that are exchanged. All EAP-FAST authenticators are identified by an authority identity (A-ID). The local authenticator sends its A-ID to an authenticating client, and the client checks its database for a matching A-ID. If the client does not recognize the A-ID, it requests a new PAC. Click PACs to view any PACs that have already been provisioned and reside on this computer. A PAC must have already been obtained to clear Allow automatic provisioning on the Security Settings. NOTE: If the provisioned Protected Access Credential (PAC) is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. PAC distribution can also be completed manually (out-of-band). Manual provisioning enables you to create a PAC for a user on an ACS server and then import it into a user's computer. A PAC file can be protected with a password, which the user needs to enter during a PAC import. To import a PAC:

1. Click PACs to open the Protected Access Credentials (PAC) list. 2. Click Import to import a PAC that resides on this computer or a server. 3. Select the PAC and click Open. 4. Enter the PAC password (optional). 5. Click OK to close this page. The selected PAC is added to PAC list. 6. Click OK to save the EAP-FAST settings and return to the Profiles list. The PAC is used for this wireless profile. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Troubleshooting Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter Wireless Event Viewer Manual Diagnostics Tool How to Resolve Errors Intel Wireless Troubleshooter The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is an application that can help you resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop screen. Once you click on the desktop alert, a diagnostic message displays the steps recommended to resolve the connection issue. For example, if a connection issue occurred because of an invalid password, the Profile manager application is launched when you click on a displayed hyperlink. You can also launch Wireless Event Viewer and enable or disable alert notifications. The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is supported under Windows XP and Windows 2000. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter Description The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter contains two panes. The left pane displays a list of available tools. The right pane displays the current connection issue. This pane is divided into two sections: the error message and the recommended action. The recommended action contains descriptions about available utilities and helps to resolve the associated connection issue. If you click on a help link, the help text is displayed in a window. If you click on the associated issue resolution link, a program is launched to resolve the connection issue. Name Menu Options File Wireless Event Viewer: Launches Wireless Event Viewer. Description Disable Notification/Enable Notification: Select to disable or enable alert notifications. Exit: Click to exit the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter application. View History: Displays or removes the History data on the right panel of the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Tools Manual Diagnostics Tool: Run diagnostic test to verify the functionality of your wireless adapter. See Manual Diagnostics Tool for more information. The tool is also accessible from the Tools menu. Help Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter Help: Displays online help for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Available Help The date, time and error message:

l Description of error. l Link to resolve error (if available). See Resolve Errors below. l Link to recommended steps to resolve error. History Maintains a list of the last five alerts. The alerts are listed chronologically, with the most recent alert at the top of the list. Manual Diagnostics Tool The Manual Diagnostics Tool tool allows you to run a set of diagnostics tests that verify the functionality of your wireless adapter. There are two levels of diagnostics details represented in this tool: user level and technical support level. At the user level, the tool only shows a short description of the different diagnostics steps that are being taken and only shows a pass or fail indication for each step. The technical support level includes the creation of a log file with contains detailed information on all the executed tests. This log file can be saved to a text file and emailed to a technical support department to troubleshoot connection problems. NOTE: For Windows Vista, select All Programs > Intel PROSet Wireless > Manual Diagnostics Tool. To set the log file location:

1. Click File 2. Click Settings to save the log file. This log file can be saved as a text file and sent to a technical support group or administrator to troubleshoot network connectivity issues. 3. Click Browse to specify the log file storage location. 4. Click OK to return to the Manual Diagnostics Tool. To run the tests:

1. Click the box next to each test to select the test to run. 2. Click Run Tests to run the selected tests. Available Test Name Hardware Test Description The test passes if the wireless adapter is present and accessible. The test fails, if the adapter is not present or present but disabled The test summary displays whether the wireless hardware is enabled or disabled. Troubleshooting l Verify that your adapter is listed under Network adapters in the Device Manager. l If the adapter is not listed, right-click Network adapters and select Scan for hardware changes. You can also reboot your system. l Verify that your adapter is enabled in the Device Manager. When the adapter is disabled, a red X is displayed on the device. Right-click the adapter and select Enable from the menu. l When the adapter displays a yellow exclamation point, right-click the adapter and reinstall the driver from the Intel PROSet/Wireless CD. l Contact you computer's manufacturer for other troubleshooting options. Driver Test The test summary displays the Intel PRO/Wireless Network Connection driver supported by the wireless adapter. The test verifies if the driver binary version is compatible with the installed version of Intel PROSet/Wireless software. The test fails if the driver binary is not found or if the driver version does not match the Intel PROSet/Wireless software version (for example, Intel PROSet/Wireless version 10.0.5 and driver version 9.0.3.9). Troubleshooting l Reinstall the drivers using the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Radio Test The test summary displays Radio On or Radio Off. The test queries the current radio state. If the radio is switched on, the test passes. If the radio is off, the test fails. Troubleshooting Verify that your wireless adapter's radio is on. There are two methods to turn the radio on and off:

l The hardware switch l The Wireless On/Wireless Off button in Intel PROSet/Wireless software. See to Enable or Disable the Wireless Radio for more information. Scan Test The test queries the wireless networks within range of your wireless adapter. The test passes if networks can be seen in the scan list. The Test Summary displays the number of networks available to connect to. Troubleshooting l Verify that you are within range of an access point. l Switch the wireless radio to off and back to on. l Verify that the wireless band setting matches the access point band setting. l Switch the access point to off and back to on. Association Test The test summary displays Associated or Not Associated. Association is the establishment and maintenance of the wireless link between devices. When security is enabled, the devices only exchange security credentials. The test checks for wireless connectivity. The test passes if the client is associated successfully. Troubleshooting l When the access point signal strength is low, utilize the signal test listed below. l Verify that a profile has been created. If created:

m Verify that the profile SSID matches the access point Network Name (SSID). m Remove the profile and create a new profile. l Verify that your wireless network is not included in the Exclude (profiles) List. l Verify that the MAC address has not been excluded in the access point. Authentication Test Describes the process after association, during which the identity of the wireless device or end-

user is verified and then allowed network access. The test queries for authentication state information, including all Cisco Compatible Extensions and security-related information. The test passes if the client is authenticated successfully. The test fails if the client is not authenticated. The Test Summary displays whether authentication is required for the network connection. Troubleshooting l Select Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter from the Tools menu on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Select Wireless Event Viewer to display error log records to resolve problems found with this test. l Edit your profile to ensure the correct credentials have been used for the WEP key, PSK, password or certificates. l Remove the existing profile and create a new profile. Signal Test The test summary displays the signal quality. If the signal quality is low, use the Troubleshoot button to diagnose and fix the problem. Troubleshooting l Move your computer 10 to 20 feet from the wireless access point or router. l Reduce interference by moving away from appliances (microwaves, cell phones or 2.4 GHz phones) or access points using the same channel. l Increase the transmission power of the access point. Ping Test The test verifies whether the wireless adapter successfully sent messages to and received replies from the access point IP address, default gateway, DHCP server (if enabled) and DNS servers. The test summary displays whether replies from these entities were received. Example: Response: AP, default gateway. No Response: DHCP server NOTE: If the ping tests to this access point and default gateway are successful but the ping test to the DNS server fails this is not a wireless network issue but a general network issue. Troubleshooting l Disable the security firewall and run the ping test again. l Contact the access point manufacturer to troubleshoot your home network setup. l Enterprise users should contact their network administrator. Troubleshoot Run Tests Close Help?

Diagnose and fix problems displayed by each of the tests. The Troubleshoot button becomes active if a test fails. Executes the tests that you have selected. Closes the page. Provides help information for this page. 4. Click Close to close the Manual Diagnostics Tool. Wireless Event Viewer The Wireless Event Viewer program displays a list of error log records. You can save all available log records to a binary format file for sending to customer support. To launch Wireless Event Viewer, select Intel Wireless Troubleshooter on the Tools menu. Click Wireless Event Viewer. Wireless Event Viewer Description Name File Description Settings:

To change the storage location of the log file. 1. Click Settings to open the Wireless Event Viewer Settings. 2. Specify the default folder for saved log files: The default location is the desktop. Click Browse to locate a new folder location. 3. File Name: Enter a file name for the log file. 4. Maximum Size: Enter the size of the file in kilobytes (KB). 5. Click OK to close and apply the new changes. Click Cancel to close without applying any changes If you want the log file copied to an archive site after a specific number of days:

1. Click Copy the log file to another location. 2. Destination Folder: Enter where to store the files or click Browse to 3. Frequency (days): Select how often you want the files moved to the select a folder location. destination folder. 4. Click OK to close and apply the new changes. Click Cancel to close without applying any changes. Exit: Click to exit Wireless Event Viewer and return to the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. NOTE: An administrator can use the Administrator Tool Application Setting, Wireless Event Log Viewer Preferences to set the default log file location. Mode Select whether you want to view current or past event traces. l Realtime Event Viewing (default): List of event traces from the current session with the Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter. l Log File Viewing: Select to view event traces saved in the log files from previous sessions with Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter. Help?

Provides help information for this page. Wireless Event Viewer Information About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Level: The severity level of the connection issue is indicated by an icon. The severity levels are:

l Information l Error l Warning Description: Brief description of the connection issue. Date and Time: Date and time of the detected connection issue. This column can be sorted in ascending or descending order. Click the column header to sort the displayed events. Opens log files archived from previous sessions with Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter. Removes the information in the Wireless Event Viewer. Saves the available log. Use the suggested name or change it. Open Clear Save As Resolve Errors Use the following recommendations to resolve network connection issues detected by Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Did not receive an IP address The ad hoc network is idle and no peers have joined the network The ad hoc network is idle and all peers have left the network You are connected to a network with default network name (SSID). The network or the access point may not be configured with security You are connected to a network that is not configured with security and there are shared folders detected in your system The wireless network adapter in the system is disabled No wireless network adapter was detected in the system No wireless network adapter driver was installed Disconnection from an access point If you are an advanced user or administrator, use these error messages to diagnose problems within your wireless network profiles. The application failed to start Authentication failed due to invalid user name Authentication failed due to invalid user credentials Authentication failed due to an invalid user certificate Authentication failed due to invalid server identity Authentication failed due to invalid server credentials Authentication failed due to an invalid server certificate Authentication failed because the AAA server is unavailable The AAA server rejected the EAP method Incorrect PIN for retrieving certificate Error occurred because the GSM adapter was unexpectedly removed Smart Card was unexpectedly removed Authentication failed because timer expired An administrator profile failed to authenticate Administrator profile did not receive an IP address Did not receive an IP address The wireless adapter failed to get a valid IP address. The wireless security password or encryption key does not match the one used by the access point. Other causes are: the wireless network requires a static IP address; there is a problem with the DHCP server; or, a general network problem. To clear this message:

l Reenter the wireless security password in the network security settings. See to Personal Security. l Restart the access point, router, computer, and DSL/cable modem. l Verify the security configuration on the access point or wireless router. For assistance, contact your access point or router manufacturer. l Contact your Administrator for help to set up your wireless connection. The ad hoc network is idle and no peers have joined the network If you create an ad hoc network and no peers join that ad hoc network for two minutes, this alert notifies you that the ad hoc network is idle. This alert notification is enabled or disabled in the Application Settings. To clear this message:

1. From the Tools menu, click Application Settings. 2. Scroll down to locate Ad hoc Network Notification. 3. Clear Notify when no peers have joined the ad hoc network. 4. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. The ad hoc network is idle and all peers have left the network If you create or join an ad hoc network with other participants, this alert will notify you when any or all participants have left the ad hoc network. This alert notification is set in the Application Settings. To clear this message:

1. From the Tools menu, click Application Settings. 2. Scroll down to locate Device to Device (ad hoc) Network. 3. Clear Notify when all peers leave the ad hoc network. 4. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. You are connected to a network with default network name

(SSID). The network or the access point may not be configured with security Connecting to an access point that uses a default network name (SSID) can be a security problem. This access point usually uses all the default security and management settings (for example, Open authentication, default IP address, user name, or password.) If this is a personal network, change the network name and security settings to improve the security of the network. This alert notification is enabled or disabled in the Application Settings. To clear this message:

1. From the Tools menu, click Application Settings. 2. Scroll down to locate SSID Notification. 3. Clear Notify when connected to a network with the default SSID name. 4. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. You are connected to a network that is not configured with security and there are shared folders detected in your system File and printer sharing enables other computers on a network to access resources on your computer. You should be cautious when you use your wireless portable computer with file and printer sharing enabled. If you are alerted when connecting to a wireless LAN with shared folders, disable this notification by following the instructions below. This alert notification is enabled or disabled in the Application Settings. To clear this message and restore the network shared folders on disconnection:

1. From the Tools menu, click Application Settings. 2. Scroll down to locate Shared Folder Notification. 3. Select Disable this notification to maintain your current shared folder settings each time that you connect to an open, unsecured network. 4. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. The wireless network adapter in the system is disabled Enable the wireless adapter. 1. Right-click My Computer. 2. Select Properties. 3. Click Hardware. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click Network Adapters. 6. Right-click the Intel PRO/Wireless adapter that is listed. 7. Click Enable. 8. Click File Exit to close the Device Manager. 9. Click OK to close System Properties. No wireless network adapter was detected in the system The system could not detect an Intel wireless adapter is the system. The adapter may be removed or not installed. First verify if there is a wireless adapter listed in the Device Manager:

1. Right-click My Computer. 2. Select Properties. 3. Click Hardware. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click Network Adapters. Is an Intel PRO/Wireless adapter is listed, update the driver from the Intel Corporation Support Web site at http://

support.intel.com/. If an Intel PRO/Wireless adapter is not listed, contact your computer manufacturer. No wireless network adapter driver was detected in the system The system could not detect an Intel wireless adapter is the system. You may need to update the wireless adapter driver. First verify if there is a wireless adapter listed in the Device Manager:

1. Right-click My Computer. 2. Select Properties. 3. Click Hardware. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click Network Adapters. If the wireless adapter is listed:

1. Right click the Intel PRO/Wireless network card that is installed in your computer. 2. Click Update Driver. The Windows Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard is displayed. 3. Click Yes, this time only. 4. Click Next. 5. If you receive the message Cannot Continue the Hardware Update Wizard, contact the Intel Corporation Support Web site at http://support.intel.com/. If the wireless adapter is not listed: Contact the Intel Corporation Support Web site at http://support.intel.com/. Disconnection from an Access Point The following error messages display when the wireless adapter is disconnected from the network access point. Disconnect from access point due to failed associations. Disconnect from access point due to authentication failures. Disconnect from access point due to TKIP Michael Integrity check failure. Disconnect from access point due to Class 2 frame non-authentication failure. Disconnect from access point due to Class 3 frame non-association failure. Disconnect from access point due to reassociation failure. Disconnect from access point due to Information Element failure. Disconnect from access point due to EAPOL-Key protocol four-way handshake failure. Disconnect from access point due to 802.1x authentication failure. Recommended action: Select the profile. Click Connect and try to associate with the network. The application failed to start The application that you specified to start when this profile connected, could not be found. Verify the path and file name in the Profile Manager Advanced Settings. To verify the path and file name:

1. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, click Profiles. 2. Select the Profile. 3. Click Properties. 4. Click Advanced. 5. Click Enable Start Application. Verify that the file name and file location path are correct. 6. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. 7. Click OK to close the General Settings and return to the Profiles list. Authentication failed due to invalid user name: Reenter user name This authentication error can be caused by an invalid user name. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. m For TTLS, PEAP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profiles: Use the following option should be selected. m Verify the User Name information. 5. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid user credentials: Reenter credentials This authentication error can be caused by invalid user credentials (could be user name, password or other form of user credentials). Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Select a TTLS, PEAP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. The 802.1x Authentication Type should be selected. 5. Select Use the following for User Credentials. 6. Verify the User Name, Domain, and password information. l If Use Windows logon or Prompt each time I connect is selected, verify that you use the correct user credentials information when you connect to the wireless network. 7. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to an invalid user certificate: Select another certificate This authentication error can be caused by invalid server (domain) credentials. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. 5. Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates. 6. Click OK. 7. For TLS profiles: Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates. 8. Click OK. Notes about Certificates: The specified identity should match who the certificate is issued to and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in with the same user name you used when the certificate was installed. start ="10"

1. Click Close. 2. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid server identity: Reenter server name This authentication error can be caused by invalid server identity information. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

style="list-style: decimal;" type=1 1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. 5. For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Verify that the Roaming Identity server name is correct. 6. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid server credentials: Reenter server credentials This authentication error can be caused by an invalid server (domain) credential. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. l For TTLS, PEAP and EAP-FAST profiles: Select Use the following for user credentials. n Verify the domain information. n If Use Windows logon or Prompt each time I connect is selected, verify that the correct domain credentials information is used when you connect to the wireless network. 5. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to an invalid server certificate: Select another certificate This authentication error can be caused by an invalid server certificate. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

style="list-style: decimal;" type=1 1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. The appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type is selected. l For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Verify that the correct Authentication Type is selected from the list. Click Next to select another certificate from the list of installed certificates or specify another server or certificate name. Click OK. m For TLS profiles: Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates and click OK. Notes about certificates: The specified identity should match who the certificate is issued to and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in with the same user name you used when the certificate was installed. 5. Click Close. 6. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed because the AAA server is unavailable The wireless adapter is associated to the access point, but the 802.1x authentication cannot be completed because of a response from the authentication server. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Select the profile 2. Click Connect and attempt to associate with the network and authenticate with the server. The AAA Server Rejected the EAP Method This error occurs when the AAA Server does not accept the configured authentication. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Double-click the Taskbar icon to open Intel PROSet/Wireless. 2. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 3. Select the associated or last-used profile from the Profiles list. 4. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 5. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 6. Verify that Enable 802.1x is selected. 7. Verify that the correct authentication type is selected. 8. Enter the required security information. 9. Click OK. The profile is now reapplied. Intel PROSet/Wireless attempts to connect to the wireless network. Incorrect PIN for retrieving certificate: Reenter PIN The certificate retrieval failed because of an incorrect PIN. Recommended action: Enter the correct PIN. Error occurred because the GSM adapter was unexpectedly removed This error occurs when the GSM adapter is not fully inserted or is unexpectedly removed from the mobile station. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Reinsert the GSM adapter. 2. Double-click the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software icon at the bottom right of the screen. 3. Select the associated or last-used profile from the profiles list. 4. Click Connect. The profile is now re-applied. Intel PROSet/Wireless Software attempts to connect to the wireless network. Smart Card was unexpectedly removed This error occurred because the Smart Card was unexpectedly removed. Use the following steps to resolve this error:

1. Insert the Smart Card. 2. Select the 802.1x EAP-SIM authentication profile. 3. Click Connect to try to associate with the network. Authentication failed because timer expired Authentication failed because the authentication timer expired while this mobile station was authenticating. A Rogue access point or a problem with the RADIUS server could have been the reason for the problem. Recommended action:

l If a rogue access point is suspected, consider adding this access point to the excluded access point list to prevent the wireless adapter from connecting to this access point in the future. l If a rogue access point is not suspected, click the profile in the Profiles list. Click Connect to associate with the network and attempt to authenticate with the server. An administrator profile failed to authenticate This error occurs when the credentials in the profile are not accepted by the authenticator (for example, an access point or AAA server). Please contact your Administrator to resolve this problem. Administrator profile did not receive an IP address The wireless adapter failed to get a valid IP address. The wireless security password or encryption key does not match the one used by the access point. Other causes are: the wireless network requires a static IP address; there is a problem with the DHCP server; or, a general network problem. Recommended action: Contact your administrator to help set up your wireless connection. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Administrator Tool Set Administrator Password Administrator Tool Settings Administrator Packages Administrator Profiles l Persistent l Pre-Logon/Common Connection l Exclude Networks l Voice over IP (VoIP) Application Settings Adapter Settings Software EAP-FAST A-ID Groups Administrator Tasks The Administrator Tool is used by the person who has administrator privileges on this computer. This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles, Pre-logon/Common profiles, and persistent connection profiles. The Administrator Tool can also be used by an Information Technology department to configure user settings within the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software and to create custom install packages to export to other systems. The Administrator Tool is located on the Tools menu. It must be selected during a Custom installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software or the feature is not displayed in the Tools menu. Set Administrator Password Users cannot modify Administrator settings or profiles unless they have the password for this tool. When you first access the Administrator Tool, you are required to enter a password. The password must not exceed 100 characters. Null passwords are not allowed. NOTE: If you do not know the original password, there is no process available to reset the password. 1. Password: Create a password (maximum 100 characters). 2. Confirm Password: Reenter the password. 3. Click OK. The Open Administrator Package displays. To change the existing password:

1. Click Administrator Tool from the Tools menu. 2. Click Change Password on the password entry form. 3. Old Password: Enter the existing password. 4. New Password: Enter the new password. 5. Confirm Password: Reenter the new password again. 6. Click OK to save the new password and enter the Administrator Tool. Administrator Tool Settings An Administrator can determine which order Administrator profiles are placed in the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. 1. Click the Administrator Tool Tools menu. 2. Click Tools > Settings to open the Administrator Tool Settings. m Select Insert on top to always place Administrator profiles at the top of the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. m Select Insert on bottom to always place Administrator profiles at the bottom the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. m Click OK to close and return to the Administrator Tool. Administrator Packages Administrator Packages are used to save administrative profiles and other settings. You can copy or send this self-extracting executable file to clients on your network. When the executable runs, the contents are installed and configured on the destination computer. To create a new package:

1. On the Tools menu, click Administrator Tool. 2. Enter your password to access the Administrator Tool. 3. Open Administrator Package: Select one of the following operating system to create a new package or open an existing package. Name Create a Windows XP or Windows 2000 package Create a Windows Vista package Open an existing package Description Create a package that can be exported to a user's computer that has either Windows XP or Windows 2000 operating system. This package allows export of all 802.1x authentication EAP-type Pre-Logon/Common and Persistent profiles. Create a package that can be exported to a user's computer that has the Windows Vista operating system. This package allows export of EAP-TTLS and EAP-SIM Common profiles only. Select to browse for and open an existing package. 6. Click OK. 7. Configure the following options to be included in the package:

Name Profiles Application Settings Adapter Settings Software EAP-FAST A-ID Groups:

Software Description Click Include Profiles in this package. Profiles can be shared with other users. Click Include Application Settings in this package. Specify application settings to be enabled. Click Include Adapter Settings in this package. Specify initial values for adapter settings used on this computer. Click Include Software in this package. Define which software components are installed on this computer. Click Include A-ID Groups. Add A-ID Group to support multiple PACs from multiple A-IDs. NOTE: This feature is not available when creating an Administrator Package for Windows Vista clients. Click Include Software in this package. Define which software components are installed on this computer. NOTE: Refer to Software for information to reduce the size of the Administrator Package executable file. 7. Click Close. 8. You are notified: The current package is changed. Would you like to save the changes?

9. Click Yes. Save the executable file to a directory on the local disk drive. 10. Click Save. The file is created. NOTE: This may take several minutes. 11. Click Finished to view the package contents. m Click Apply this package to this computer if you want to use the package configuration on the Administrator's computer. m Copy the executable file to any user's computer to install the configuration that has been saved in the package. When you execute the package file, it is a silent install. NOTE: Administrator profiles for Windows Vista are stored in an XML format. NOTE: You can also select Save Package on the Administrator Tool File Menu to save the package. To edit a package:

1. Access the Administrator Tool. 2. On the Open Administrator Package page, click Open an existing package to edit an existing package. 3. Click Browse. Locate the package's executable file. 4. Click Open. Make your updates. 5. Click Close. 6. You are notified: The current package is changed. Would you like to save the changes?

7. Click Yes. Save the executable file to a directory on the local disk drive. NOTE: You can also select Open Package on the Administrator Tool File menu to edit an Administrator Package. Administrator Profiles Administrator Profiles are owned and managed by the network administrator or the administrator of this computer. These profiles are common or shared by all users on this computer. However, end users cannot modify these profiles. They can only be modified from the Administrator Tool, which is password protected. There are two types of Administrator Profiles: Persistent or Pre-logon/Common. You can also configure Voice over IP (VoIP) settings for export to a soft-phone application. NOTE: For Windows Vista packages, only EAP-SIM and TTLS Common profiles can be created. Persistent Connection Persistent profiles are applied at boot time or whenever no one is logged on the computer. After a user logs off, a Persistent profile maintains a wireless connection either until the computer is turned off or a different user logs on. Persistent Connect key points:

l The following types of profiles can be created as Persistent profiles:

m All profiles that do not require 802.1x authentication (for example, Open authentication with WEP encryption, Open authentication with no encryption). m All profiles with 802.1x authentication that have the credentials saved: LEAP or EAP-FAST. m Profiles with security settings that include the "Use the following user name and password" option. m Profiles that use the machine certificate to authenticate. m WPA-Enterprise profiles that do not use a user certificate. m WPA-Personal profiles. l Persistent profiles are applied at system power up and after a user logs off. To create a Persistent Profile:

1. Click Include Profiles in this package . 2. Click Persistent. 3. Click Add to open the General Settings. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the name of your wireless network. 6. Operating Mode: Network (Infrastructure) is selected by default. 7. Administrator Profile Type: Persistent: Active when no users are logged on is selected. 8. Click Next. 9. Select Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. See TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, or EAP-FAST for 802.1x security configuration information. 10. Click OK. Pre-Logon/Common Connection Pre-logon/Common profiles are applied prior to a user log on. If Single Sign On support is installed, the connection is made prior to the the Windows log on sequence (Pre-logon/

Common). If Single Sign On support is not installed, the profile is applied once the user session is active. Pre-logon/Common profiles always appear at the top of a the Profiles list. Users can still prioritize profiles that they have created but they cannot reprioritize Pre-logon/Common profiles. Because these profiles appear at the top of the profiles list, Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically attempts to connect to the Administrator profiles first before any user created profiles. NOTE: Only administrators can create or export Pre-logon/Common profiles. Pre-logon/Common Connect key points are:

l Pre-logon/Common Connect is active only at the Windows log on. l The following types of profiles can be created as Pre-logon/Common profiles:

m 802.1x MD5, PEAP, TTLS or EAP-FAST profiles that use either the "Use Windows Logon user name and password" or "Use the following user name and password"

credentials when configuring the profile's security settings. m LEAP profiles that use the "Prompt for the user name and password." credentials when configuring the profile's security settings. m 802.1x PEAP or TTLS profiles with user or machine certificates (the user must have administrative rights to use machine certificates). m TLS profiles that use digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. m EAP-SIM profiles that use a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card to validate your credentials with the network. m All non-802.1x (Open and WEP) Common or User Based profiles. l A Pre-logon/Common profile is applied at Windows user log-on time. Pre-Logon/Common Connection Status Pre-logon/Common Connect support is installed during a Custom install of the Intel PROSet/

Wireless software. Refer to Install and Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature for more information. NOTE: If the Single Sign On or Pre-logon/Common Connect features are not installed, an administrator is still able to create Pre-logon/Common profiles for export to a user's computer. The following describes how the Pre-logon/Common Connect feature functions from system power-up. The assumption is that a saved profile exists. This saved profile has valid security settings marked with "Use Windows Logon user name and password" that is applied at the time of Windows log on. 1. After a system power-up, enter your Windows log on domain, user name, and password. 2. Click OK. The Pre-logon/Common profile Status page displays the progress of the network connection. After the wireless adapter is connected to the network access point, the Status page closes and the Windows user logs on. n If the corresponding access point rejects your credentials during the Pre-

logon/Common Connect, the profile credentials prompts you for your user credentials. n Enter your credentials. n Click OK. The profile is applied and the Status page displays the progress of the connection status until you are logged onto Windows. n Click Cancel on the Credentials page to select another profile. NOTE: A user certificate can only be accessed by a user that has been authenticated on the computer. Therefore, a user should log onto the computer once (using either a wired connection, alternate profile or local log in) before using a Pre-logon/Common profile that authenticates with a user certificate. When you log off, any wireless connection is disconnected and a persistent profile (if one is available) is applied. Under certain circumstances it is desirable to maintain the current connection (for example, if user-specific data needs to be uploaded to the server post-log off or when roaming profiles are used). Create a profile which is marked as both Pre-logon/Common and persistent to achieve this functionality. If such a profile is active when the user logs off, the connection is maintained. To create a Pre-logon/Common Profile:

1. Click Include Profiles in this package. 2. Click Pre-logon/Common. 3. Click Add to open the General Settings. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 6. Operating Mode: Network (Infrastructure) is selected by default. 7. Administrator Profile Type: Pre-logon/Common: Active when a user is logged on. This profile is shared by all users. This profile type is already selected. 8. Click Next. 9. Click Advanced to open the Advanced Settings. Use the Advanced Settings to set the following:

Name Auto Connect Description Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. Mandatory Access Point Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. Password Protection NOTE: Unavailable for Administrator Profiles. Start Application:

NOTE: Unavailable for Administrator Profiles. User Name Format An administrator can select the user name format for the authentication server. The choices are:

l user (default) l user@domain l user@domain.com l DOMAIN\user NOTE: User Name Format is available only in the Advanced Settings in the Administrator Tool. It is unavailable when creating a user profile from the Intel PROSet/Wireless Create Wireless Profile manager. 10. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. 11. Select Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. See EAP-SIM, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, or EAP-FAST for 802.1x security configuration information. 12. Click OK to save the profile and add it to the Administrator profiles list. NOTE: If a Persistent connection was already established, a Pre-Login/Common profile is ignored unless the profile is configured with both Pre-logon/Common and Persistent connection options. Exclude Networks Administrators can designate networks to be excluded from connection. Once a network is excluded, only an administrator can remove the network from the Exclude list. The excluded network is displayed in the Intel PROSet/Wireless Exclude List Management. NOTE: Unavailable for Windows Vista packages. To exclude a network:

1. Click Include Profiles in this package. 2. Click Exclude. 3. Click Add to open the Exclude Network (SSID). 4. Network Name: Enter the network name of the network that you want to exclude. 5. Click OK to add the network name to the list. To remove a network from exclusion:

1. Select the network name in the Exclude list. 2. Click Remove. The network is deleted from the list. Voice over IP (VoIP) Connection Intel PROSet/Wireless software supports VoIP third-party soft-phone applications. Third-party VoIP applications support Voice Codecs. Codecs generally provide a compression capability to save network bandwidth. Intel PROSet/Wireless software supports the following International Telecommunications Union

(ITU) codec standards:

Algorithm Codec ITU G.711 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) ITU G.722 SBADPCM (Sub-Band Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) ITU G.723 Multi-rate Coder ITU G.726 ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) ITU G.727 Variable-Rate ADPCM ITU G.728 LD-CELP (Low-Delay Code Excited Linear Prediction) ITU G.729 CS-ACELP (Conjugate Structure Algebraic-Code Excited Linear Prediction) An administrator can export VoIP settings to configure various codec data rates and frame rates to improve voice quality in VoIP transmissions. To configure VoIP settings:

NOTE: Ensure Voice over IP is not disabled in the Administrator Tool Application Settings. It is enabled by default. 1. Click Include Profiles in this package. 2. Click VoIP. 3. Click Add to open the Create VoIP Profiles page. 4. Select the Codec bandwidth, application usage, and frame rate. For Voice Data:

G711 has 10ms frame rate with 64kbps bit rate G722 has 10ms frame rate with 64kbps bit rate G723 has 30ms frame rate with either 5.3kbps or 6.4kbps bit rate G726-32 has 10ms frame rate with 32kbps bit rate G728 has 2.5ms frame rate with 16kbps bit rate G729 has 10ms frame rate with 10kbps bit rate Codec Usage Frame Rate l Interactive Voice l Audio Conference l Voice Data l Video l Streaming Audio l 10 l 20 l 30 l G711_64kbps l G722_64kbps l G722_56kbps l G722_48kbps l G722_1_32kbps l G722_1_24kbps l G722_1_16kbps l G726_16kbps l G726_24kbps l G726_32kbps l G726_40kbps l G728_16kbps l G729a_8kbps l G729e_11_8kbps l GIPS_iPCM_VARIABLE l G722_2_VARIABLE 5. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. 6. Click Close to save the profile settings to a package. Application Settings An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. To configure Application Settings:

1. Click Include Application Settings in this package. 2. Enable or disable each setting listed in the table below. Name Description 802.1x Authentication Enable a user to create or connect to profiles that support different 802.1x authentication EAP types. Administrator Tool Application Auto Launch Application On Radio Toggle CCXv4 Cache Credentials Device to Device (ad hoc) Import and Export Maintain Connection Message On Radio Toggle Persistent Connection Microsoft Windows XP Coexistence Pre-Logon/Common Cisco Mode Profile Connectivity Security Level Single Sign On Select which 802.1x authentication EAP types you want enabled on a users computer: EAP SIM, EAP LEAP, EAP TLS, EAP TTLS, EAP PEAP, EAP FAST. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Disable access to the Administrator Tool on a users computer. Select to start a batch file, executable file, or script automatically when a specific profile connects to the network. For example, start a Virtual Private Network

(VPN) session automatically whenever a user connects to a wireless network. Enables a third-party application to disable the Intel PROSet/Wireless Enable Radio or Disable Radio switch. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select Enable CCXx4 to Enable Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 4 (CCXv4) features for EAP-FAST profiles. NOTE: The EAP-FAST A-ID (Authority Identifier) Groups feature in the Administrator Tool is unavailable if CCXv4 is not enabled. Select which of the following prompts to enable or disable on a user's computer for EAP-FAST PAC provisioning:

Turn off prompts and warnings for unauthenticated provisioning: Option to turn off prompts and warnings for PAC auto-provisioning if there is no PAC or there is no PAC that matches the A-ID sent by the server that it is connected to. Turn off prompts when switching default server

(A-ID): Option to turn off prompts when a client encounters a server that has provisioned a PAC before but is not currently selected as the default server. Turn off unauthenticated provisioning after PAC is provisioned: Option to turn off auto-provisioning automatically after a PAC for that A-ID has been provisioned. NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select to save credentials after a user logs on. If the wireless connection temporarily disconnects, the saved credentials are used upon reconnection. The credentials are cleared when the user logs off. NOTE: If cleared, The Prompt each time I connect option is unavailable when creating profiles Enable or disable whether a user is able to either create Device to Device (ad hoc) profiles or join Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. Select one of the following to enable or disable whether the user can connect to device to device networks:

l Enable device to device networking. l Enable secure device to device networking only. l Disable device to device networking. Select to either allow a user to configure profiles with device to device (ad hoc) settings or prevent configuration of device to device (ad hoc) profiles. l Show device to device application settings l Hide device to device application settings. To remove the Device to Device (ad hoc) operating mode from the Create Wireless Profile General Settings, select both Disable device to device networking and Hide device to device application settings. This prevents a user from creating profiles that support Device to Device (ad hoc) network. Select to import to or export profiles from a users computer. Enable permits auto import of user profiles when copied to an auto import folder. Select to hide the Maintain Connection option in the Create Wireless Profile Advanced Settings. The Maintain Connection option maintains the wireless connection with a user profile after log off. NOTE: The Maintain Connection option may be used with Nortel VPN client when it is configured to Logoff on Connect. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Enables a third-party application to notify a user that the Intel PROSet/Wireless radio is either on or off. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select Ensure that persistent connection and computer policies are updated prior to user log on. NOTE:Updating policies may delay the log on screen for up to 2 minutes. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select Enable Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration and Intel PROSet/Wireless to coexist on this system. Enable this option to allow Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration and Intel PROSet/Wireless to exist together on this system. When you select this option, you prevent Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service from being disabled when Intel PROSet/Wireless is enabled. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Enable Cisco Mode during a Pre-logon/Common Connection. Cisco access points have the capability to support multiple wireless network names (SSIDs) but only broadcast one. In order to connect to such an access point, an attempt is made to connect with each profile. This is referred to as Cisco Mode. NOTE: The Pre-logon/Common Connection may take longer to connect. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select the profile connectivity level on a users computer. Disable Intel user-profile switching. Users are only able to connect with the first Pre-logon/Common profile or connect with Pre-logon/Common profiles only. l Allow the user to connect to all administrator profiles. l Allow the user to only connect to the first administrator profile. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select the security level on a user's computer?

Users are able to connect to profiles only with this security level. l Allow the user to connect to networks with Personal Security only. l Allow the user to connect to networks with Enterprise Security only. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select which Administrator Profile types are enabled on a user computer. l Persistent Connection: Profiles are active during start up and when no user is logged onto the computer. l Pre-Logon/Common Connection: Profiles are active immediately once a user logs onto the computer. Common profiles are enabled if Pre-logon/

Common features are not installed on a users computer. Common profiles are active after a user has logged on and the session becomes active. Persistent and Pre-Logon/Common profiles are placed at the top of the users profiles list. They cannot be changed or deleted by a user. Support Information NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Specify the support information displayed in the About box of the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. l Support URL: Enter the support center web site that you want your customers to access for technical support. l Support Phone Number: Enter the telephone number that you want your customers to call for technical support. Voice over IP Wi-Fi Manager Enables a third-party software to use the VoIP application on a user's computer. The default setting enables this feature. NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Select which Wi-Fi manager controls a users wireless connections. Use either the previous logged on users Wi-Fi manager or allow each user to select their preferred Wi-Fi manager. l Allow all users to switch between Intel PROSet/

Wireless and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration after log on. l Wi-Fi manager at log on is determined by the active Wi-Fi manager when the last user logged off. Wi-Fi(R) Protected Setup Wireless Event Log Viewer NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Enable registering other devices. Intel PROSet/Wireless software can be configured to operate as a registrar for a Wi-Fi Protected Setup supported access points. The registrar securely transfers the access point key or password automatically or manually with a USB flash drive or other external device. Click Hide Enable Device Registration Application Setting to hide the Enable device registration Application Settings NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select where to save the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter Wireless Event Viewer Log file. 1. In the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter, click File >

Settings to open the Wireless Event Viewer Settings. 2. Specify the default folder for saved log files:

The default location is the desktop. Click Browse to locate a new folder location. 3. File Name: The file name is set by default. it includes the computer name, domain name and user name of the person 4. Maximum Size: Enter the size of the file in kilobytes (KB). 5. Click OK to close and apply the new changes. Click Cancel to close without applying any changes If you want the log file copied to an archive site after a specific number of days:

1. Click Copy the log file to another location. 2. Destination Folder: Enter where to store the files or click Browse to select a folder location. 3. Frequency (days): Select how often you want the files moved to the destination folder. 4. Click OK to close and apply the new changes. Click Cancel to close without applying any changes. Wireless On/Off NOTE: Enable registering other devices. Intel PROSet/

Wireless software can be configured to operate as a registrar for a Wi-Fi Protected Setup supported access points. The registrar securely transfers the access point key or password automatically or manually with a USB flash drive or other external device. Click Hide Enable Device Registration Application Setting to hide the Enable device registration Application Settings NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Select Disable Wireless On/Off selection to prevent a user from accessing the Wireless On or Wireless Off control on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window or Taskbar menu. A user is notified that The feature is disabled by the administrator if they attempt to turn on or off the radio control. Select Add 802.11a Radio On/Off selection to add the 802.11a Wireless On/Off control to the Taskbar menu and the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window on a user's computer. Select Disable 802.11a Radio On/Off selection to prevent a user from turning off the 802.11a radio. A user is notified that The feature is disabled by the administrator if they attempt to turn on or off the 802.11a radio control. Once this feature is installed on a user's computer, follow the instructions below to turn on or off the 802.11a radio control. To turn off the 802.11a radio:

1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless Main window, click the Wireless On button. The list of radio options is displayed. 2. Select 802.11a Radio Off. The 802.11a radio is now inactive. To turn on the 802.11a radio:

1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless Main window, click the 802.11a Radio Off button. The list of radio options is displayed. 2. Select Wireless On. The 802.11a radio is now active. NOTE: This option is available only for wireless adapters that support 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g. This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. NOTE: This setting is unavailable for Windows Vista packages. Closes the Administrator Tool. Provides help information for this page. Close Help?

Adapter Settings To configure Adapter Settings:

1. Click Include Adapter Settings in this package. 2. For each setting listed in the table below, select one of the following options:

m Use default value: Resets the setting on the user machine to the default value. m No change: Maintains the user selected value. The administrator decides not to enforce all the settings on a user's computer. The user can change the adapter setting values from the Intel PROSet/Wireless Advanced menu. m Select the value: The administrator selects the value that is to be used on the user's computer. Name Description 802.11n Channel Width Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20Mhz. Auto is the default setting. 802.11n Mode Ad Hoc Channel NOTE: This setting is available only if the adapter is an Intel

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_. The 802.11n standard builds upon previous 802.11x standards by adding multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO). MIMO increases data throughput to improve transfer rate. Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11n mode of the adapter. Enabled is the default setting. An administrator can enable or disable support for high throughput mode to reduce power-consumption or conflicts with other bands or compatibility issues. NOTE: This setting is available only if the adapter is an Intel

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_. There is no need to change the channel unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel from the default channel. Value: Select the allowed operating channel from the list. l 802.11b/g: Select this option when 802.11b and 802.11b (2.4 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is used. l 802.11a: Select this option when 802.11a (5 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is used. NOTE: When an 802.11a channel is not displayed, ad hoc networks are not supported for the channel. Ad Hoc Power Management Set power saving features for Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. l Disable: Select when connecting to ad hoc networks that contain stations that do not support ad hoc power management l Maximum Power Savings: Select to optimize battery life. l Noisy Environment: Select to optimize performance or connecting with multiple clients. Ad Hoc QoS Mode Mixed Mode Protection Power Management Preamble Mode Roaming Aggressiveness NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM (Wi-Fi MultiMedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA). When WMM is enabled, the adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. l WMM Enabled.(Default) l WMM Disabled NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Power Management: Allows you to select a balance between power consumption and adapter performance. The wireless adapter power settings slider sets a balance between the computer's power source and the battery. Select a balance between power consumption and adapter performance. PSP - Power Saving Mode CAM - Constantly Awake Mode Select one of the Power Saving Mode levels:

PSP CAM: The client adapter is powered up continuously. PSP Level 1: PSP set at maximum power. PSP Levels 2-4: PSP set to maximize power. PSP Level 5: PSP set to maximize battery life. PSP Auto: Default in PSP Level 6: Balances between power consumption and battery life. NOTE: Power consumption savings vary based on infrastructure settings. Changes the preamble length setting received by the access point during an initial connection. Always use a long preamble length to connect to an access point. Auto Tx Preamble allows automatic preamble detection. If supported, short preamble should be used. If not, use long preamble (Long Tx Preamble). NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection. Define how aggressively a wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point Click Use default value to balance between not roaming and performance or select a value from the list. Values:

0: No Roaming: Your wireless client does not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point 1-3: Allow Roaming 2: Default: Balances between not roaming and performance. Click Use default value to select. 4: Maximum Roaming. Throughput Enhancement Change the value of the Packet Burst Control. l Enable: Select to enable throughput enhancement. l Disable: (Default) - Select to disable throughput enhancement. Transmit Power If you decrease the transmit power, you reduce the radio coverage. Default Setting: Highest power setting Values:

TX Minimum: Lowest Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to a lowest transmit power. Enable you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduce the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoid congestion and interference with other devices. TX Level 1, TX Level 2, TX Level 3: Set by country requirements. TX Maximum: Highest Maximum Coverage:

Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional radio devices. NOTE: The optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that this radio shares radio spectrum with. Wireless Mode NOTE:This setting takes effect when either Network

(Infrastructure) or Device to Device (ad hoc) mode is used. Select which band to use for connection to a wireless network:

l 802.11a only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a l 802.11b only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b l 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11g networks only. networks only. networks only. l 802.11a and 802.11g: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a and 802.11g networks only. l 802.11b and 802.11g: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. l 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. NOTE: These wireless modes (modulation types) determine the discovered access points displayed in the Wireless Networks list. NOTE: This setting is not applicable for Windows Vista(TM) client. Saves settings and return to the previous page. Closes the page and cancels any changes. Provides help information for this page. OK Close Help?

Software Select which Intel PROSet/Wireless software components are installed on a user's computer. 1. Select Include Software in this package. 2. Place the Intel PROSet/Wireless installation CD in the CD drive. 3. Specify the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software Installation directory: Click Browse to locate the Autorun.exe file. 4. Click OK. 5. Specify which components you want to include in this package: Select which applications to install on a user's computer. Name Wireless LAN adapter driver Intel PROSet/

Wireless Description Installs the NDIS driver for the wireless LAN adapter. Select which features to install on a user's computer. l Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter: Helps you resolve wireless connection issues. l Single Sign On: Matches your Windows log on user name and password credentials for wireless network connections. m Pre-logon/Common Connect: A Pre-logon/Common profile is active once a user logs onto the computer. l WMI Support: (Windows Management Instrumentation) Allows administrators who do not have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed to remotely manage clients that do have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed. l Administrator Tool: Installs the Administrator Tool to the Tools menu. NOTE: Intel Wireless Troubleshooter and Single Sign On are not applicable for Windows Vista Client. To reduce the size of the software files in your Administrator Package:

1. Copy the installation folders from your Intel PROSet/Wireless software to a local directory. 2. Remove unused language folders from the \IA32\Docs\ and the \IA32\IProLang folders. For example, if you only need the English folders, you can remove all the language folders except ENU. NOTE: If you create an Administrator Package on a Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition system, the language files are located in the \Docs and the

\IA32E\IProLang folders. 3. Use the files from your local directory to add the software files to the Administrator package. NOTE: If you plan to use Novell(R) Client(TM) for Windows, it should be installed prior to installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, you should remove it prior to installation of Novell Client for Windows. EAP-FAST A-ID Groups NOTE: This feature is unavailable if CCXv4 is not selected in the Administrator Tool Application Settings An Authority Identifier (A-ID) is the radius server that provisions Protected Access Credential

(PACs) A-ID groups. A-ID groups are shared by all users of the computer and allow EAP-FAST profiles to support multiple PACs from multiple A-IDs. The A-ID groups can be pre-configured by the administrator and set up through an Administrator Package on a user's computer. When a wireless network profile encounters a server with an A-ID within the same group of the A-ID specified in the wireless network profile, it uses this PAC without a prompt to the user. To add an A-ID Group:

1. Select Include A-ID Groups. 2. Click Add. 3. Enter a new A-ID group name. 4. Click OK. The A-ID group is added to the A-ID Group list. If the A-ID group is locked, then additional A-IDs cannot be added to the group. To add an A-ID to an A-ID group:

1. Select a group from the A-ID Groups list. 2. Click Add in the A-IDs section. 3. Select an A-ID. 4. Click OK. The A-ID is added to the list. Once an A-ID group has been selected, the A-IDs are extracted from the PACs on the A-ID group server. The list of A-IDs is automatically populated. NOTE: EAP-FAST AID Groups are not applicable for Windows Vista Client. Administrator Tasks How to Obtain a Client Certificate If you do not have any certificates for EAP-TLS (TLS) or EAP-TTLS (TTLS) you must obtain a client certificate to allow authentication. Certificates are managed from either Internet Explorer or the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. Windows XP and Windows 2000: When a client certificate is obtained, do not enable strong private key protection. If you enable strong private key protection for a certificate, you need to enter an access password for the certificate every time this certificate is used. You must disable strong private key protection for the certificate if you configure the service for TLS or TTLS authentication. Otherwise, the 802.1x service fails authentication because there is no logged in user to provide the required password. Notes about Smart Cards After a Smart Card is installed, the certificate is automatically installed on your computer and is chosen from the personal certificate store and root certificate store. Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication Step 1: Obtain a certificate To allow TLS authentication, you need a valid client certificate in the local repository for the logged-in user's account. You also need a trusted CA certificate in the root store. The following information provides two methods for obtaining a certificate:

l From a corporate certification authority (CA) implemented on a Windows 2000 server. l Import a certificate from a file with Internet Explorer's certificate import wizard. If you do not know how to obtain a user certificate from the CA, consult your administrator for the procedure. To install the CA on the local machine:

1. Obtain the CA and store it on your local drive. 2. Click Import. The Certificate Import Wizard opens. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Browse to locate the certificate on your local drive. 5. Click the exported certificate. 6. Click Open. 7. Click Next. 8. Click Place all certificates in the following store. 9. Click Browse to open the Select Certificate Store. 10. Click Show physical stores. 11. Click OK. 12. From the list of stores, scroll up and expand Trusted Root Certificate Authorities. 13. Click Local Computer. 14. Click OK. 15. Click Next. 16. Click Finish to complete the process. 17. Reboot after a certificate is installed. Use Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to verify that the CA is installed in the machine store. 1. In the Start menu, click Run. 2. Enter MMC. 3. Click OK to open The Microsoft Management Console. 4. Click File. 5. Click Add/Remove Snap-in. 6. Click Add to open the Add Standalone Snap-in page. 7. Click Certificates. 8. Click Add. 9. Click Computer account. 10. Click Next. 11. Click Finish. 12. Click Close. 13. Click OK. 14. In the console, click Certificates (Local Computer). 15. Click Trusted Root Certificate Authorities. 16. Click Certificates. 17. Verify that the CA you just installed is listed. 18. Click File. 19. Click Exit to close the console. Obtain a certificate from a Microsoft Windows 2000 CA:

1. Start Internet Explorer and browse to the Certificate Authority HTTP Service (use an URL such as http://yourdomainserver.yourdomain/certsrv with certsrv being the command that brings you to the certificate authority. You can also use the IP address of the server machine. For example, "192.0.2.12/certsrv."

2. Logon to the CA with the name and password of the user account you created on the authentication server. The name and password do not have to be the same as the Windows log on name and password of the current user. 3. On the Welcome page of the CA, select Request a certificate task and submit the form. 4. Choose Request Type: Select Advanced request. 5. Click Next. 6. Advanced Certificate Requests: Select Submit a certificate request to this CA using a form. 7. Click Submit. 8. Advanced Certificate Request: Select User certificate template. 9. Click Mark keys as exportable. 10. Click Next. Use the provided defaults. 11. Certificate Issued: Click Install this certificate. NOTE: If this is the first certificate you have obtained, the CA first asks you if it should install a trusted CA certificate in the root store. This is not a trusted CA certificate. The name on the certificate is that of the host of the CA. Click Yes. You need this certificate for both TLS and TTLS. 12. If your certificate was successfully installed, you see the message, "Your new certificate has been successfully installed."

13. To verify the installation, click Internet Explorer Tools Internet Options Content Certificates. The new certificate should be installed in the Personal folder. Import a Certificate from a File 1. Open Internet Properties (right-click on the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop. 2. Select Properties. 3. Content: Click Certificates. The list of installed certificates appears. 4. Click Import to open the Certificate Import Wizard. 5. Select the file. 6. Specify your access password for the file. Clear Enable strong private key protection. 7. Certificate store: Click Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate (the certificate must be in the user accounts personal store to be accessible). 8. Proceed to Completing the Certificate Import and click Finish. To configure a profile with WPA authentication with WEP or TKIP encryption that uses TLS authentication:

NOTE: Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Step 1 or consult your administrator. Specify the certificate used by Intel PROSet/Wireless style="list-style-type: decimal"

1. On the Profile page, click Add to open General Settings. 2. Profile Name: Enter a profile name. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 5. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 6. Click Enterprise Security. 7. Network Authentication: Select Open (Recommended). 8. Data Encryption: Select WEP. 9. 802.1x Enabled: Selected. 10. Authentication Type: Select TLS. Step 1 of 2: TLS User 1. Obtain and install a client certificate. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate:

Name Static Password One-time password (OTP) Obtain the password from a hardware token device. PIN (Soft Token) Description On connection, enter the user credentials. Obtain the password from a soft token program. 3. Click Next. Step 2 of 2: TLS Server 1. Select one of the following credential retrieval methods: Validate Server Certificate or Specify Server or Certificate Name. 2. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list. 3. Click the new profile at the end of the Profiles list. Use the up and down arrows to change the priority of the new profile. 4. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. 5. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. Back to Top Back to Contents Back to Contents Glossary of Terms Numerical A B C D E F G H I L M N O P R S T W Term 802.11 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.1x AAA Server Access Point

(AP) ad hoc network AES-CCMP Definition The 802.11 standard refers to a family of specifications developed by the IEEE for wireless LAN technology. The 802.11 specifies an over-the-air interface between a wireless client and a base station or between two wireless clients and provides 1 or 2 Mbps transmission in the 2.4 GHz band using either frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) or direct sequence spread spectrum

(DSSS). The 802.11a standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps and an operating frequency of 5 GHz. The 802.11a standard uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) transmission method. Additionally, the 802.11a standard supports 802.11 features such as WEP encryption for security. 802.11b is an extension to 802.11 that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b uses only DSSS. Throughput data rate 5+ Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band. The 802.11g standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11g networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.1x is the IEEE Standard for Port-Based Network Access Control. This is used in conjunction with EAP methods to provide access control to wired and wireless networks. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server. A system to control access to computer resources and track user activity. A device that connects wireless devices to another network. For example, a wireless LAN, Internet modem or others. A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-

computer network. Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. BER CCX CKIP Bit Rate Certificate CA (certificate authority) Broadcast SSID BSSID Authentication Verifies the identity of a user logging onto a network. Passwords, digital certificates, smart cards and biometrics are used to prove the identity of the client to the network. Passwords and digital certificates are also used to identify the network to the client. Bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. A corporate certification authority implemented on a server. In addition, Internet Explorers certificate can import a certificate from a file. A trusted CA certificate is stored in the root store. Cisco Compatible eXtension. Cisco Compatible Extensions Program ensures that devices used on Cisco wireless LAN infrastructure meet the security, management and roaming requirements. Used for client authentication. A certificate is registered on the authentication server (i.e., RADIUS server) and used by the authenticator. Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is a Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses a key message integrity check and message sequence number to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode. CKIP is Cisco's version of TKIP. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the Access Point's connection. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with FHSS. Short for Extensible Authentication Protocol, EAP sits inside of Point-to-Point Protocols (PPP) authentication protocol and provides a generalized framework for several different authentication methods. EAP is supposed to head off proprietary authentication systems and let everything from passwords to challenge-response tokens and public-key infrastructure certificates all work smoothly. EAP-FAST, like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. The EAP-GTC (Generic Token Card) is similar to the EAP-OTP except with hardware token cards. The request contains a displayable message, and the response contains the string read from the hardware token card. EAP-OTP (One-Time Password) is similar to MD5, except it uses the OTP as the response. The request contains a displayable message. The OTP method is defined in RFC 2289. The OTP mechanism is employed extensively in VPN and PPP scenarios but not in the wireless world Extensible Authentication Protocol-Subscriber Identity Module (EAP-

SIM) authentication can be used with:

Client computer DSSS EAP-FAST EAP-GTC EAP-OTP EAP-SIM EAP l Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, and WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise. l Data Encryption types: None, WEP and CKIP. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. The SIM card is used to validate your credentials with the network A type of authentication method using EAP and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates that use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. A type of authentication method using EAP and Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS). EAP-TTLS uses a combination of certificates and another security method such as passwords. Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to interpret the data. Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with DSSS. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. The threshold at which the wireless adapter breaks the packet into multiple frames. This determines the packet size and affects the throughput of the transmission. Gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000,000 cycles per second. EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Encryption FHSS File and printer sharing Fragmentation threshold GHz Host computer The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a Infrastructure Network IEEE Internet Protocol (IP) address LAN LEAP MAC Mbps MHz modem or network adapter. A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an organization involved in defining computing and communications standards. The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. Local area network. A high-speed, low-error data network covering a relatively small geographic area. Light Extensible Authentication Protocol. A version of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). LEAP is a proprietary extensible authentication protocol developed by Cisco, which provides a challenge-response authentication mechanism and dynamic key assignment. A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless adapter, on a LAN or WAN. Megabits-per-second. Transmission speed of 1,000,000 bits per second. Megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000 cycles per second. MIC (Michael) Message integrity check (commonly called Michael). MS-CHAP An EAP mechanism used by the client. Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) Version 2, is used over an encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. Nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1,000,000,000) of a second. Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing. Allows any device network access. If encryption is not enabled on the network, any device that knows the Service Set Identifier

(SSID) of the access point can gain access to the network. Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft protocol sponsored by Microsoft, Cisco, and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted tunnel similar to the tunnel used in secure web pages (SSL). Inside the encrypted tunnel, a number of other EAP authentication methods can be used to perform client authentication. PEAP requires a TLS certificate on the RADIUS server, but unlike EAP-

TLS there is no requirement to have a certificate on the client. PEAP has not been ratified by the IETF. The IETF is currently comparing PEAP and TTLS (Tunneled TLS) to determine an authentication standard for 802.1X authentication in 802.11 wireless systems. PEAP is an authentication type designed to take advantage of server-side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including user's passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate with each other without using an access point. The state in which the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When the notebook is in Power Save mode, receive packets are stored in the access point until the wireless adapter wakes up. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks are listed under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Configuration Utility (Windows 2000 environment) or Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows XP environment). Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication and accounting system that verifies users credentials and grants access to requested resources. Radio Frequency. The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz (Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One Mega-Hertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One Giga-

Hertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Movement of a wireless node between two micro cells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. Current wireless network roaming is only supported in the same subnet of a network. ns OFDM Open Authentication PEAP Peer-to-Peer Mode Power Save mode Preferred network RADIUS RF Roaming Shared Key SIM RTS threshold The number of frames in the data packet at or above which an RTS/

CTS (request to send/clear to send) handshake is turned on before the packet is sent. The default value is 2347. An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. Subscriber Identity Module card is used to validate credentials with the network. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. Silent Mode Access Points or Wireless Routers have been configured to not broadcast the SSID for the wireless network. This makes it necessary to know the SSID in order to configure the wireless profile to connect to the access point or wireless router. Silent Mode Single Sign On Single Sign On feature set allows the 802.1x credentials to match SSID Stealth TKIP TLS TTLS WEP WEP Key Wi-Fi Wireless Router WLAN WPA WPA2 WPA-

Enterprise your Windows log on user name and password credentials for wireless network connections. Service Set Identifier. SSID or network name is a value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. Each SSID may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive. A stealth access point is one that has the capability and is configured to not broadcast its SSID. This is the wireless network name that appears when a DMU (Device Management Utility, such as Intel PROSet/Wireless) scans for available wireless networks. It is commonly considered a weak security feature, in that it does not readily disclose the presence of the wireless network. To connect to a stealth access point, a user must specifically know the SSID and configure their DMU accordingly. The feature is not a part of the 802.11 specification, and is known by differing names by various vendors: closed mode, private network, SSID broadcasting. Temporal Key Integrity protocol improves data encryption. Wi-Fi Protected Access utilizes its TKIP. TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a re-keying method. TKIP is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless networks. TKIP is the next generation of WEP, the Wired Equivalency Protocol, which is used to secure 802.11 wireless networks. TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus fixing the flaws of WEP. Transport Layer Security. A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. Tunneled Transport Layer Security. These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS, the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-

encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols, such as MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (CHAP, PAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Wired Equivalent Privacy. Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64- and 128-

bit (64-bit is sometimes referred to as 40-bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs) defined in the 802.11b standard. WEP is designed to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP aims to provide security by data over radio waves so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Either a pass phrase or hexadecimal key. The pass phrase must be 5 ASCII characters for 64-bit WEP or 13 ASCII characters for 128-bit WEP. For pass phrases, 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and ~!@#$%^&*()_+|`-={}|[]\:";'<?,./ are all valid characters. The hex key must be 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 64-

bit WEP or 26 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 128-bit WEP. Wireless Fidelity. Is meant to be used generically when referring of any type to 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, or dual-

band. A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer within the same network and to connect to the Internet. Wireless Local-Area Network. A type of local-area network that uses high-frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEEs 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA consists of RC4 and TKIP and provides support for BSS

(Infrastructure) mode only. (Not compatible with WPA2.) Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2). This is the second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification. WPA2 consists of AES encryption, pre-authentication and PMKID caching. It provides support for BSS (Infrastructure) mode and IBSS (ad hoc) mode. (Not compatible with WPA.) Wi-Fi Protected Access-Enterprise applies to corporate users. A new standards-based, interoperable security technology for wireless LAN (subset of IEEE 802.11i draft standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. WPA is a Wi-Fi standard that was designed to improve upon the security features of WEP as follows:

l Improved data encryption through the temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP). TKIP scrambles the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-checking feature, ensures that the keys have not been tampered with. l l User authentication, which is generally missing in WEP, through the extensible authentication protocol (EAP). WEP regulates access to a wireless network based on a computers hardware-specific MAC address, which is relatively simple to be sniffed out and stolen. EAP is built on a more secure public-key encryption system to ensure that only authorized network users can access the network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEEs 802.11i standard upon its completion. small network or home environment. Wi-Fi Protected Access-Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK) mode does not use an authentication server. It can be used with the data encryption types WEP or TKIP. WPA-PSK requires configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK). You must enter a pass phrase or 64 hex characters for a Pre-Shared Key of length 256-bits. The data encryption key is derived from the PSK. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access-Personal provides a level of security in the WPA-PSK Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Wireless Network Overview About Wireless Network Technology What do I need to setup a Wireless Network?

Wireless Networking Basics l What is a wireless network management utility?

l Network Name l Profiles l Security l Configure a Wireless Network l Identify a Wireless Network l Select a Wireless Network Mode How do I turn my radio on and off?

About Wireless Network Technology A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connects computers without network cables. Instead computers use radio communications to send data between each other. In a WLAN, a radio communications device called an access point or wireless router connects network computers and provides Internet or network access. You can communicate directly with other wireless computers, or connect to an existing network through a wireless access point. When you set up your wireless adapter, you select the operating mode for the kind of wireless network you want. You can use your Intel(R) PRO/Wireless Network Connection adapter to connect to other similar wireless devices that comply with the 802.11 standard for wireless networking. What do I need to setup a Wireless Network?

To setup a wireless network, you need the following:

l Broadband internet service such as cable or DSL. This includes a broadband modem l A wireless router l A wireless network adapter (wireless card) for each computer that you want to connect to the wireless network. Wireless Networking Basics What is a wireless network manager or client utility?

The software application on your computer that is used to manage your wireless connections is commonly referred to as a wireless network manager or client utility. Your Dell portable computer ships with two client utilities installed: Intel PROSet/

Wireless and Microsoft Windows Zero Configuration. Intel PROSet is set by default as the utility which controls the management of your wireless connections. You can select which utility is the managing utility based on your preference. However, it is important to understand that the wireless network connection settings

(profiles) created by each utility are only applied when that utility is managing. It is a common error for users to inadvertently switch between the two utilities. This is a problem because network settings created in one utility are not applied if the other utility is managing the wireless connections. It is recommended that you choose one client utility to manage your wireless connections, and stay with it. Refer to Connect to a Network for more information. Network Name Each wireless network uses a unique Network Name to identify the network. This name is called the Service Set Identifier (SSID). When you set up your wireless adapter, you specify the SSID. If you want to connect to an existing network, you must use the name for that network. If you set up your own network, you can make up your own name and use it on each computer. The name can be up to 32 characters long and contain letters and numbers. Profiles A profile is a saved group of network settings. Profiles display in the Profiles list. Profiles are useful when moving from one wireless network to another. Different profiles can be configured for each wireless network. Profile settings can include the network name (SSID), operating mode, and security settings. From the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window you can add, edit, and remove profiles. Security The 802.11 wireless networks use encryption to help protect your data. Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) uses a 64- or 128-bit shared encryption key to scramble data. Before a computer transmits data, it uses a secret encryption key to scramble the data. The receiving computer uses this same key to unscramble the data. If you connect to an existing network, use the encryption key provided by the administrator of the wireless network. If you set up your own network, you can make up your own key and use it on each computer. The 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-

management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each providing a different approach to authentication, but all employing the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point. The 802.1x authentication methods include passwords, certificates and smart cards

(plastic cards that hold data). 802.1x authentication option can only be used with Infrastructure operation mode. Configure a Wireless Network There are three basic components that must be configured for an 802.11 wireless network to operate properly:

l Network Name: Each wireless network uses a unique Network Name to identify the network. This name is called the Service Set Identifier (SSID). When you set up your wireless adapter, you specify the SSID. If you want to connect to an existing network, you must use the name for that network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own name and use it on each computer. The name can be up to 32 characters long and contain letters and numbers. l Profiles: When you set up your computer to access a wireless network, Intel

(R) PROSet/Wireless creates a profile for the wireless settings that you specify. If you want to connect to another network, you can scan for existing networks and make a temporary connection, or create a new profile for that network. After you create profiles, your computer will automatically connect when you change locations. l Security: The 802.11 wireless networks use encryption to help protect your data. Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) uses a 64-bit- or 128-bit shared encryption key to scramble data. Before a computer transmits data, it uses a secret encryption key to scramble the data. The receiving computer uses this same key to unscramble the data. If you are connecting to an existing network, use the encryption key provided by the administrator of the wireless network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own key and use it on each computer. 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-

management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each providing a different approach to authentication but all employing the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point Refer to Get Connected Identify a Wireless Network Depending on the size and components of a wireless network, there are many ways to identify a wireless network:

l The Network Name or Service Set Identifier (SSID): Identifies a wireless network. All wireless devices on the network must use the same SSID. l Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID): A special case of SSID used to identify a wireless network that includes access points. l Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID): A special case of SSID used to identify a network of wireless computers configured to communicate directly with one another without using an access point. l Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID): A unique identifier for each wireless device. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of the device. l Broadcast SSID: An access point can respond to computers sending probe packets with the broadcast SSID. If this feature is enabled on the access point, any wireless user can associate with the access point by using a blank

(null) SSID. l Basic Service Set (BSS): Consists of two or more wireless nodes, or stations, which have recognized each other and have established communications. l Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS): A mode of operation in an 802.11 system that allows direct communication between 802.11 devices without the need to set up a communication session with an access point. Select a Wireless Network Mode Wireless networks can operate with or without access points, depending on the number of users in the network. Infrastructure mode uses access points to allow wireless computers to send and receive information. Wireless computers transmit to the access point, the access point receives the information and rebroadcasts it to other computers. The access point can also connect to a wired network or to the Internet. Multiple access points can work together to provide coverage over a wide area. Device-to-Device mode, also called ad hoc mode, works without access points and allows wireless computers to send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use Device-to-Device mode to network computers in a home or small office or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. How do I turn my radio on and off?

You can want to turn your wireless adapter's radio on and off to:

l Conserve your computers battery when not connected l Meet the requirement to turn off radios on airplanes to prevent interference There are two methods to turn the radio on and off:

l The hardware switch l The Enable/Disable button in Intel PROSet/Wireless software A common cause for users not being able to connect to a wireless network is due to the radio being turned off. If you are unable to connect to a wireless network, verify that your radio is turned on by both the hardware switch and the software Enable/

Disable button. Verify that you have checked both methods. Refer to Enable or Disable the Wireless Radio for more information. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Security Overview WEP Encryption l Open and Shared Key authentication 802.1x Authentication l How 802.1x Authentication Works l 802.1x Features WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Mode Personal Mode WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal AES-CCMP TKIP TLS TTLS l Authentication Protocols PEAP l Authentication Protocols Cisco Features l Cisco LEAP l Cisco Rogue Access Point Security Feature l Fast Roaming (CCKM) l CKIP l 802.11b and 802.11g Mixed Environment Protection Protocol l EAP-FAST l Mixed Cell Mode l Radio Management WEP Encryption Use IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption to prevent unauthorized reception of wireless data. WEP encryption provides two levels of security that use a 64-bit key (sometimes referred to as 40-bit) or a 128-bit key

(also known as 104-bit). For stronger security, use a 128-bit key. If you use encryption, all wireless devices on your wireless network must use the same encryption keys. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption and shared authentication provide protection for your data on the network. WEP uses an encryption key to encrypt data before transmitting it. Only computers that use the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. Authentication provides an additional validation process from the adapter to the access point. The WEP encryption algorithm is vulnerable to passive and active network attacks. TKIP and CKIP algorithms include enhancements to the WEP protocol that mitigate existing network attacks and address its shortcomings. Open and Shared Key Authentication IEEE 802.11 supports two types of network authentication methods: Open System and Shared Key. l When Open authentication is used, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management request that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station or access point grants any request for authentication. Open authentication allows any device network access. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any device that knows the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the access point can gain access to the network. l When Shared Key authentication is used, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Shared key authentication requires that the client configure a static WEP key. The client access is granted only if it passes a challenge-based authentication. 802.1x Authentication How 802.1x Authentication Works 802.1x Features Overview The 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-

management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each provides a different approach to authentication but all employ the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point. In most protocols, upon completion of the 802.1x authentication process, the supplicant receives a key that it uses for data encryption. Refer to How 802.1x authentication works for more information. With 802.1x authentication, an authentication method is used between the client and a Remote Authentication Dial-

In User Service (RADIUS) server connected to the access point. The authentication process uses credentials, such as a user's password that are not transmitted over the wireless network. Most 802.1x types support dynamic per-user, per-session keys to strengthen the static key security. 802.1x benefits from the use of an existing authentication protocol known as the Extensible Authentication Protocol

(EAP). 802.1x authentication for wireless networks has three main components:

l The authenticator (the access point) l The supplicant (the client software) l The authentication server (RADIUS) The 802.1x authentication security initiates an authorization request from the wireless client to the access point, which authenticates the client to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) compliant RADIUS server. This RADIUS server may authenticate either the user (via passwords or certificates) or the system (by MAC address). In theory, the wireless client is not allowed to join the networks until the transaction is complete. There are several authentication algorithms used for 802.1x. Some examples are:

EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, and Protected EAP (PEAP). These are all methods for the wireless client to identify itself to the RADIUS server. With RADIUS authentication, user identities are checked against databases. RADIUS constitutes a set of standards that addresses Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA). Radius includes a proxy process to validate clients in a multi-server environment. The IEEE 802.1x standard is for controlling and authenticating access to port-based 802.11 wireless and wired Ethernet networks. Port-based network access control is similar to a switched local area network (LAN) infrastructure that authenticates devices attached to a LAN port and prevent access to that port if the authentication process fails. What is RADIUS?

RADIUS is the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, an Authorization, Authentication, and Accounting (AAA) client-server protocol, that is used when a AAA dial-up client logs in or out of a Network Access Server. Typically, a RADIUS server is used by Internet Service Providers (ISP) to perform AAA tasks. AAA phases are described as follows:

l Authentication phase: Verifies a user name and password against a local database. After credentials are verified, the authorization process begins. l Authorization phase: Determines whether a request is allowed access to a resource. An IP address is assigned for the dial-up client. l Accounting phase: Collects information on resource usage for the purpose of trend analysis, auditing, session time billing, or cost allocation. How 802.1x Authentication Works A simplified description of 802.1x authentication is:

l A client sends a "request to access" message to an access point. The access point requests the identity of the client. l The client replies with its identity packet which is passed along to the l The authentication server sends an "accept" packet to the access point. l The access point places the client port in the authorized state and data traffic authentication server. is allowed to proceed. 802.1x Features l 802.1x supplicant protocol support l Support for the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) - RFC 2284 l Supported Authentication Methods:

m EAP TLS Authentication Protocol - RFC 2716 and RFC 2246 m EAP Tunneled TLS (TTLS) m PEAP l Supports Windows XP and Windows 2000 NOTE: Intel PROSet/Wireless security features on Windows Vista support TTLS and EAP-SIM authentication only. WPA or WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. To strengthen data encryption, WPA utilizes its Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements that include a per-packet key mixing function, a message integrity check (MIC) called Michael an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a rekeying mechanism. With these enhancements, TKIP protects against WEP's known weaknesses. The second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification is known as WPA2. Enterprise Mode: Enterprise Mode verifies network users through a RADIUS or other authentication server. WPA utilizes 128-bit encryption keys and dynamic session keys to ensure your wireless network's privacy and enterprise security. Enterprise Mode is targeted to corporate or government environments. Personal Mode: Personal Mode requires manual configuration of a pre-shared key

(PSK) on the access point and clients. PSK authenticates users via a password, or identifying code, on both the client station and the access point. No authentication server is needed. Personal Mode is targeted to home and small business environments. WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise: Provide this level of security on enterprise networks with an 802.1x RADIUS server. An authentication type is selected to match the authentication protocol of the 802.1x server. NOTE: WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are interoperable. WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal: Provide this level of security in the small network or home environment. It uses a password also called a pre-shared key

(PSK). The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. If your wireless access point or router supports WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The same password entered into access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. AES-CCMP - (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) The new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. Choose AES-

CCMP as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. NOTE: Some security solutions may not be supported by your computers operating system and may require additional software or hardware as well as wireless LAN infrastructure support. Check with your computer manufacturer for details. TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) is an enhancement to WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) security. TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism, which fixes the flaws of WEP. TLS A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. TTLS These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security), the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols, as MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Authentication Protocols l MD5: Message Digest 5 (MD5) is a one-way authentication method that uses user names and passwords. This method does not support key management, but does require a pre-configured key if data encryption is used. It can be safely deployed for wireless authentication inside EAP tunnel methods. l PAP: Password Authentication Protocol is a two way handshake protocol designed for use with PPP. Password Authentication Protocol is a plain text password used on older SLIP systems. It is not secure. l CHAP: Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol is a three-way handshake protocol that is considered more secure than PAP Authentication Protocol. l MS-CHAP (MD4): Uses a Microsoft version of RSA Message Digest 4 challenge-and-reply protocol. This only works on Microsoft systems and enables data encryption. To select this authentication method causes all data to be encrypted. l MS-CHAP-V2: Introduces an additional feature not available with MSCHAPV1 or standard CHAP authentication, the change password feature. This feature allows the client to change the account password if the RADIUS server reports that the password has expired. PEAP PEAP is a new Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) IEEE 802.1x authentication type designed to take advantage of server-side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-

TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including users' passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. Authentication Protocols l Generic Token Card (GTC): Carries user specific token cards for authentication. The main feature in GTC is Digital Certificate/Token Card-

based authentication. In addition, GTC includes the ability to hide user name identities until the TLS encrypted tunnel is established, which provides additional confidentiality that user names are not being broadcasted during the authentication phase. l MS-CHAP-V2: Refer to MS-CHAP-V2 above. l TLS: The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. Refer to TLS above. Cisco Features NOTE: Cisco Features are not supported on a Windows Vista platform. Cisco LEAP Cisco LEAP (Cisco Light EAP) is a server and client 802.1x authentication through a user-supplied logon password. When a wireless access point communicates with a Cisco LEAP-enabled RADIUS (Cisco Secure Access Control Server [ACS]), Cisco LEAP provides access control through mutual authentication between client wireless adapters and the wireless networks and provides dynamic, individual user encryption keys to help protect the privacy of transmitted data. Cisco Rogue Access Point Security Feature The Cisco Rogue Access Point feature provides security protection from an introduction of a rogue access point that could mimic a legitimate access point on a network in order to extract information about user credentials and authentication protocols that could compromise security. This feature only works with Cisco's LEAP authentication. Standard 802.11 technology does not protect a network from the introduction of a rogue access point. Refer to LEAP Authentication for more information. Fast Roaming (CCKM) When a wireless LAN is configured for fast reconnection, a LEAP-enabled client device can roam from one access point to another without involving the main server. Using Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), an access point configured to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS) takes the place of the RADIUS server and authenticates the client without perceptible delay in voice or other time-sensitive applications. CKIP Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses the following features to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode:

l Key Permutation (KP) l Message Sequence Number 802.11b and 802.11g Mixed Environment Protection Protocol Some access points, for example Cisco 350 or Cisco 1200, support environments in which not all client stations support WEP encryption; this is called Mixed-Cell Mode. When these wireless networks operate in "optional encryption" mode, client stations that join in WEP mode, send all messages encrypted, and stations that use standard mode send all messages unencrypted. These access points broadcast that the network does not use encryption, but allow clients that use WEP mode. When Mixed-

Cell is enabled in a profile, it allows you to connect to access points that are configured for "optional encryption."

EAP-FAST EAP-FAST like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. Provisioning in EAP-FAST is negotiated solely by the client as the first communication exchange when EAP-FAST is requested from the server. If the client does not have a pre-

shared secret Protected Access Credential (PAC), it is able to initiate a provisioning EAP-FAST exchange to dynamically obtain one from the server. EAP-FAST documents two methods to deliver the PAC: manual delivery through an out-of-band secure mechanism and automatic provisioning. l Manual delivery mechanisms are any delivery mechanism that the administrator of the network feels is sufficiently secure for their network. l Automatic provisioning establishes an encrypted tunnel to protect the authentication of the client and the delivery of the PAC to the client. This mechanism, while not as secure as a manual method may be, is more secure than the authentication method used in LEAP. The EAP-FAST method is divided into two parts: provisioning and authentication. The provisioning phase involves the initial delivery of the PAC to the client. This phase only needs to be performed once per client and user. Mixed-Cell Mode Some access points, for example Cisco 350 or Cisco 1200, support environments in which not all client stations support WEP encryption; this is called Mixed-Cell Mode. When these wireless networks operate in "optional encryption" mode, client stations that join in WEP mode, send all messages encrypted, and stations that use standard mode, send all messages unencrypted. These access points broadcast that the network does not use encryption, but allows clients that use WEP mode to join . When Mixed-Cell is enabled in a profile, it allows you to connect to access points that are configured for "optional encryption."

Radio Management When this feature is enabled your wireless adapter provides radio management information to the Cisco infrastructure. If the Cisco Radio Management utility is used on the infrastructure, it configures radio parameters, detects interference and rogue access points. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Specifications Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ Intel PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 2.00 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage On-board diversity 53-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/

n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/

n) 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 4 to 12 (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz

(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps IEEE 802.11a Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11g Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11b Data Rates 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps General Operating Systems Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Microsoft Windows 2000. Microsoft Windows XP

(32 and 64 bit). Windows Vista(TM) (32 and 64 bit) Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b 802.11a, 802.11n Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_

(version with Draft N capabilities disabled. Draft N refers to: IEEE P802.11n(TM)/D1.0 Draft Amendment to STANDARD [FOR] Information Technology-Telecommunications and information exchange between systems-Local and Metropolitan networks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer

(PHY) specifications: Enhancements for Higher Throughput) Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 2.00 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 53-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/

n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/

n) 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 4 to 12 (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz

(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps IEEE 802.11a Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11g Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11b Data Rates 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps General Operating Systems Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Microsoft Windows 2000. Microsoft Windows XP (32 and 64 bit). Windows Vista(TM) (32 and 64 bit) Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b 802.11a, 802.11n Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-

bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express (TM) X1 Height 2.59 in x 2.77 in x 0.18 in (65.8 mm x 70.3 mm x 4.5 mm) Antenna Interface Connector Tyco connector Connector Interface 36-pin PCI Express edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing at temperature of 25 C to 85 C Frequency Modulation 5 GHz (802.11a) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 4 to 12 non-

overlapping, dependent on SKU 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) Channel 1-11 (MoW) Channel 1-13 (RoW) 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows 2000. Microsoft Windows XP (32 and 64 bit), Microsoft Windows Vista

(32 and 64 bit) WPA - Enterprise, WPA - Personal, WPA2

- Enterprise, WPA2 - Personal Enhanced EAP: EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS/

MSCHAPv2, PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2, PEAPv1/

EAP-GTC, WMM, WMM-UAPSD (WIP) Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11d, IEEE 802.11h Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-

bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 2.00 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 53-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 92% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 55 C) Frequency Modulation 5 GHz (802.11a) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 5 GHz UNII:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 2.4 GHz ISM:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 4 to 12 non-

overlapping, dependent on country Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-

bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 2.00 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 53-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 92% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 55 C) Frequency Modulation 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-

bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1x: EAP-

SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions Weight Mini PCI Type 3A Width 2.85 in x Length 1.75 in x Height 0.20 in

(59.75 mm x 50.95 mm x 5 mm) 0.7 oz. (12.90 g.) Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 124-pin SO-DIMM edge connector Voltage 3.3 Volt Operating Temperature 0 to +70 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 85% non-condensing Frequency Modulation 5 GHz (802.11a) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General 2.400 - 2.472 GHz

(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 2.4 GHz ISM:

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 4 to 12 non-

overlapping, dependent on country Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v3.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-

bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit. 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions Weight Mini PCI Type 3B Width 2.34 in x Length 1.75 in x Height 0.20 in

(59.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 5 mm) 0.7 oz. (12.90 g.) Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 124-pin mini PCI edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +70 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 85% non-condensing Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Channels Data Rates General OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK 2.400 - 2.472 GHz (US) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Japan) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK Full 14 channel support 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v2.0 IEEE 802.11g and 802.11b Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, AES (128-bit), WEP 128-bit and 64-bit. Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Customer Support Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-to-date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://support.intel.com Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Back to Contents Back to Contents Regulatory Information Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN and Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ The information in this document applies to the following products:

Quad-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g/802.11n) Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN (model WM4965AGN) Tri-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g) Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ (model WM4965AG_) NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter meet the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:

directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Antenna use:

m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l IEEE Std. 802.11n compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN adapter The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter may be restricted to:

l Using the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ wireless devices before you turn it on. Regulatory information Information for the OEMs and Integrators:

The following statement must be included with all versions of this document supplied to an OEM or integrator, but should not be distributed to the end user. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. l Please refer to the full Grant of Equipment document for other restrictions. l This device must be operated and used with a locally approved access point. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating an Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter wireless device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE:The Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Caution: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-

GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001)..

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz (Europe ETSI) Low band 5.25 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only 5.47 - 5.725 GHz is current not allowed in Czech Republic and France. Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. S S K S A S T I T S O I P I O S 1999/5/E K. I Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich das Gert Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. E T N P A Intel(R) Corporation D

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ S S S S T S D S O Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel

(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/

EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, owiadcza, e Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. iuo Intel(R) Corporation izjavlja, da je ta Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel (R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Hr me lsir Intel(R) Corporation yfir v a Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved at utstyret Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN or Intel(R) Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. esky

[Czech]

Dansk

[Danish]

Deutsch

[German]

Esti

[Estonian]

English Espaol

[Spanish]

k

[Greek]

Franais

[French]

Italiano

[Italian]

Latviski

[Latvian]

Lietuvi

[Lithuanian]

Nederlands

[Dutch]

Malti

[Maltese]

Magyar

[Hungary]

Polski

[Polish]

Portugus

[Portuguese]

Slovensko

[Slovenian]

Slovensky

[Slovak]

Suomi

[Finnish]

Svenska

[Swedish]

slenska

[Icelandic]

Norsk

[Norwegian]:

France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur . 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Italy A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:

1. D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2. D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:

1. D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2. D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. Japan Indoor use only. Korea Taiwan Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection and the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection The information in this document applies to the following products:

Tri-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (model WM3965ABG) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (model WM3945ABG) Dual-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection (model WM3945BG) NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter meet the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:

directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Antenna use:

m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel(R) PROSet/

Wireless software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection are designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel

(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter may be restricted to:

l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless devices before you turn it on. Regulatory information Information for the OEMs and Integrators:

The following statement must be included with all versions of this document supplied to an OEM or integrator, but should not be distributed to the end user. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. l Please refer to the full Grant of Equipment document for other restrictions. l This device must be operated and used with a locally approved access point. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE:The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection adapter, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter, or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Caution: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-

GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001)..

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz (Europe ETSI) Low band 5.25 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only 5.47 - 5.725 GHz is current not allowed in Czech Republic and France. Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. esky

[Czech]

Dansk

[Danish]

Deutsch

[German]

Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich das Gert Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. E l l h n i M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I L O I P E C E T I K E I A T A X E I H D H G I A S I T S K S T I P S L S A S O I O I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. E T N P A Intel(R) Corporation D Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection)S S 1999/5/E S O S D S T K. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel

(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, owiadcza, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel

(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/

CE. iuo Intel(R) Corporation izjavlja, da je ta Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection

(Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection

(Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection

(Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Hr me lsir Intel(R) Corporation yfir v a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved at utstyret Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Esti

[Estonian]

English Espaol

[Spanish]

k

[Greek]

Franais

[French]

Italiano

[Italian]

Latviski

[Latvian]

Lietuvi

[Lithuanian]

Nederlands

[Dutch]

Malti

[Maltese]

Magyar

[Hungary]

Polski

[Polish]

Portugus

[Portuguese]

Slovensko

[Slovenian]

Slovensky

[Slovak]

Suomi

[Finnish]

Svenska

[Swedish]

slenska

[Icelandic]

Norsk

[Norwegian]:

France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur . 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Italy A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:

1. D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2. D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:

1. D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2. D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. Japan Indoor use only. Korea Taiwan Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection The information in this document applies to the following products:

Tri-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection (model WM3B2915ABG) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection (model WM3A2915ABG) NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/

IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:

directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Antenna use:

m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm

(8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel(R) PROSet/

Wireless software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information Information for the OEMs and Integrators:

The following statement must be included with all versions of this document supplied to an OEM or integrator, but should not be distributed to the end user. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. l Please refer to the full Grant of Equipment document for other restrictions. l This device must be operated and used with a locally approved access point. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001)..

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz (Europe ETSI) Low band 5.25 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only 5.47 - 5.725 GHz is current not allowed in Czech Republic and France. Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Czech Danish Dutch English Estonian Finnish French German Greek Hungary Icelandic Italian Latvian Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES."

Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG Bij deze verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat deze Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Intel(R) Corporation dclare que ce Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation die bereinstimmung des Gertes Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien).=

E T A Intel(R) Corporation D N P Connection S I P S T S O S 1999/5/E K. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Intel lysir her med yfir a thessi bunadur, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection , uppfyllir allar grunnkrofur, sem gerdar eru i R&TTE tilskipun ESB nr 1999/5/EC Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network S T S O S A S K I T S L S S S I O Lithuanian Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad Intel(R) Pro/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connectionatitinka 1999/5/EC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas nuostatas". Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-

Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, deklaruj, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection spenia wymagania zasadnicze oraz stosowne postanowienia zawarte Dyrektywie 1999/5/EC. Portuguese Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Malti Polish Slovak Slovenia Spanish Swedish France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur . 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais:

Seulement 5.15 -5.35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. Japan Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. (Translation?) Italy A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:

- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105

(free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use.

- D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:

- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso privato ;

- D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Greece A license is required for the outdoor use of band 5.470 5.725 GHz. Belarus 2.4 GHz OFDM (802.11g) is not allowed at this time. Indonesia 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Kuwait 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Oman If the modules are less than 100 milliwatts they are unlicensed but if they are more than 100 milliwatts, the user is responsible for getting a license to operate from Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) in Sultanate of Oman. Taiwan Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved UAE 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Ukraine 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Regulatory Information: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:

directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection product is not designed for use with high-

gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Local Restrictions on 802.11b and 802.11g Radio Usage All frequencies used by 802.11b and 802.11g are harmonized. Some countries though may not allow 802.11g. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std. 802.11b-1999. Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant. Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2200BG Mini PCI adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/

Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel PROSet/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 2 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. U.S. Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.462 GHz CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 2, and RSS-210, Issue 4 (Dec. 2000). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 2, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000). To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) E l l h n i M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E S C E T I K E I A T A X E I H D H G I A M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E C E T I K E D I A T A X E I H D H G I A Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. English Finnish Dutch French Swedish Danish German Greek Icelandic Italian Spanish Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Bij deze verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat deze Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Intel(R) Corporation dclare que ce Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation die bereinstimmung des Gertes Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien) E T N P A Intel(R) Corporation D Connection S I P S T S 1999/5/E S O K. Intel lysir her med yfir a thessi bunadur, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection , uppfyllir allar grunnkrofur, sem gerdar eru i R&TTE tilskipun ESB nr 1999/5/EC. Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network S T S O S A S K I T S L S S S I O Portuguese Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection est Malti conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-

Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC New Member States requirements of Declaration of Conformity Estonian Hungary Slovak Czech Slovenia Latvian Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES."

iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad Intel(R) Pro/Wireless 2200BG Network Connectionatitinka 1999/5/EC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas nuostatas". Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, deklaruj, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection spenia wymagania zasadnicze oraz stosowne postanowienia zawarte Dyrektywie 1999/5/EC. Polish France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais:

Seulement 5.15 -5.35 GHz autoris pour le 802.1 Belgique Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:

- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105

(free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use.

- D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:

- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso privato;

- D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Belarus 2.4 GHz OFDM (802.11g) is not allowed at this time. Taiwan Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Back to Contents M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E C E T I K E D I A T A X E I H D H G I A Back to Contents Warranty Product Warranty Information One-Year Limited Hardware Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3965ABG Network Connection PCI Card (the Product), that the Product, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intels publicly available specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging. SOFTWARE OF ANY KIND DELIVERED WITH OR AS PART OF THE PRODUCT IS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED "AS IS", SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDING ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), provided however, that Intel warrants that the media on which the software is furnished will be free from defects for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery. If such a defect appears within the warranty period, you may return the defective media to Intel for replacement or alternative delivery of the software at Intel's discretion and without charge. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the software. If the Product which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will:

l REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR l REPLACE the Product with another product, OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, l REFUND the then-current Intel price for the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that the Product, whether purchased stand-alone or integrated with other products, including without limitation, semi-conductor components, will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: (i) any costs associated with the replacement or repair of the Product, including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to any printed circuit board or integrated with other products;

(ii) damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, accident, abuse, alteration, repair, improper or unauthorized installation or improper testing, or (iii) any Product which has been modified or operated outside of Intels publicly available specifications or where the original product identification markings (trademark or serial number) have been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product; or (iv) issues resulting from modification (other than by Intel) of software products provided or included in the Product, (v) incorporation of software products, other than those software products provided or included in the Product by Intel, or (vi) failure to apply Intel-supplied modifications or corrections to any software provided with or included in the Product. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for the Product, you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support ("ICS") center in your region (http://support.intel.com/support/notebook/centrino/sb/CS-

009883.htm) within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address, telephone numbers and, in the USA, valid credit card information; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identification number found on the Product; and (4) an explanation of the problem. The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICSs verification that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization ("RMA") number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid (within the USA), and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intels property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations of liability and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states

(or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTELS RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, LOSS OF GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION

(EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. IMPORTANT! UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER ARE NOT DESIGNED, OR INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING OR LIFE SUSTAINING SYSTEMS, TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, NUCLEAR SYSTEMS, OR FOR ANY OTHER MISSION CRITICAL APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR.

 

 

416491-B21.book Page i Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installation Guide WLAN Mini Card Installation Guide (GR) Installation Guide (IS) Installation Guide (FR) Installation Guide (IT) Installation Guide (JP) Installation Guide (KR) Installation Guide (SC) Installation Guide (TC) Document Part Number: 416491-B21 April 2006 416491-B21.book Page iii Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide WLAN Mini Card First Edition: April 2006 Document Part Number: 416491-B21 416491-B21.book Page iii Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents English Before you begin . 1 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 2 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 5 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 6 Information and updates. 8 German Before you begin . 9 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 10 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 13 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 14 Information and updates. 16 Spanish (International) Before you begin . 17 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 18 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 21 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 22 Information and updates. 24 Installation Guide iii 416491-B21.book Page iv Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents French Before you begin . 25 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 26 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 29 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 30 Information and updates. 32 Italian Before you begin . 33 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 34 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 37 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 38 Information and updates. 40 Japanese Before you begin . 41 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 42 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 45 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 46 Information and updates. 48 Korean Before you begin . 49 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 50 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 53 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 54 Information and updates. 56 iv Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page v Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents S Chinese Before you begin . 57 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 58 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 61 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 62 Information and updates. 64 T Chinese Before you begin . 65 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 66 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 69 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 70 Information and updates. 72 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 74 Brazilian notices. 77 Canadian notices . 78 Avis Canadien . 78 European Union notices . 79 Indian notice. 81 Japanese notices . 81 Taiwan notice . 86 Installation Guide v 416491-B21.book Page vi Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM 416491-B21.book Page 1 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 1 416491-B21.book Page 2 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 2 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 3 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 3 416491-B21.book Page 4 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 4 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 5 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software English The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 5 416491-B21.book Page 6 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 6 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 7 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 7 416491-B21.book Page 8 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 8 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 9 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 9 416491-B21.book Page 10 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 10 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 11 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 11 416491-B21.book Page 12 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 12 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 13 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software German The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 13 416491-B21.book Page 14 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 14 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 15 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 15 416491-B21.book Page 16 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 16 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 17 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 17 416491-B21.book Page 18 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 18 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 19 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 19 416491-B21.book Page 20 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 20 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 21 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Installing the WLAN Mini Card software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 21 416491-B21.book Page 22 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 22 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 23 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 23 416491-B21.book Page 24 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 24 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 25 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 25 416491-B21.book Page 26 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 26 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 27 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 27 416491-B21.book Page 28 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 28 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 29 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software French The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 29 416491-B21.book Page 30 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 30 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 31 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 31 416491-B21.book Page 32 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 32 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 33 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 33 416491-B21.book Page 34 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 34 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 35 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 35 416491-B21.book Page 36 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 36 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 37 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Italian The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 37 416491-B21.book Page 38 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 38 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 39 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 39 416491-B21.book Page 40 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 40 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 41 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 41 416491-B21.book Page 42 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 42 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 43 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 43 416491-B21.book Page 44 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 44 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 45 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Japanese The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 45 416491-B21.book Page 46 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 46 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 47 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 47 416491-B21.book Page 48 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 48 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 49 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 49 416491-B21.book Page 50 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 50 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 51 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 51 416491-B21.book Page 52 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 52 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 53 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Korean The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 53 416491-B21.book Page 54 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 54 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 55 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 55 416491-B21.book Page 56 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 56 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 57 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 57 416491-B21.book Page 58 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 58 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 59 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 59 416491-B21.book Page 60 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 60 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 61 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 61 416491-B21.book Page 62 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 62 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 63 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 63 416491-B21.book Page 64 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 64 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 65 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 65 416491-B21.book Page 66 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 66 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 67 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 67 416491-B21.book Page 68 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 68 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 69 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software T Chinese The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 69 416491-B21.book Page 70 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 70 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 71 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 71 416491-B21.book Page 72 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 72 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 73 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices. Installation Guide 73 416491-B21.book Page 74 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 74 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 75 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify the product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Installation Guide 75 416491-B21.book Page 76 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 76 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 77 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

-

Installation Guide 77 416491-B21.book Page 78 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65-

to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 78 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 79 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM European Union notices Regulatory Notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Installation Guide 79 416491-B21.book Page 80 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 416491-B21.book Page 81 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Installation Guide 81 416491-B21.book Page 82 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Wireless LAN 802.11b device 2. 4DS 4 Wireless LAN 802.11g device 2. 4OF 4 Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

82 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 83 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Installation Guide 83 416491-B21.book Page 84 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

84 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 85 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Bluetooth device 2 . 4 F H 1 Regulatory Notices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

Installation Guide 85 416491-B21.book Page 86 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Taiwan notice 86 Installation Guide

 

 

Installation Guide WLAN Module Installation Guide (GR) Installation Guide (IS) Installation Guide (FR) Installation Guide (IT) Installation Guide (JP) Installation Guide (KR) Installation Guide (SC) Installation Guide (TC) Document Part Number: 453005-B21 May 2007 Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide WLAN Module First Edition: May 2007 Document Part Number: 453005-B21 Contents English Before you begin . 1 Installing the WLAN module. 2 Installing the WLAN module software . 5 Removing a WLAN module . 6 Information and updates. 8 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 10 Modifications. 10 Cables . 10 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . 11 Products with wireless LAN devices. 12 Brazilian notices. 13 Canadian notices . 13 Avis Canadien . 14 European Union notices . 14 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 16 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 17 Indian notice. 17 Korean notice . 17 Taiwan notice . 18 Airline travel notice . 18 Installation Guide iii 453005-B21 English Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures, refer to the user guides included with your computer to perform the following steps:

1. Identify the WLAN module slot location and how to access it. The WLAN module slot can usually be accessed by opening a compartment cover on the bottom of the computer, but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 1 English Installing the WLAN module CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to the Removing a WLAN module section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the antenna connector cables in the system. Some notebook PCs have 2 antenna connector cables and some have 3 antenna connector cables. 2 Installation Guide English 3. Insert the WLAN module 1 into the slot at an angle, press the module down 2, and use the screws 3 provided in this option kit to secure the module in place. For HP Compaq 2510, 2710, 6510, 6710, and 8510 Notebook PCs, use screws in the plastic bag labeled 1. For HP Compaq 6910 and 8710 Notebook PCs, use screws in the plastic bag labeled 2. Installation Guide 3 English 4. Connect the antenna cables to the WLAN module. Be sure to connect each antenna cable to the appropriate connector on the module. For example, connect cable 1 to Connector 1. The WLAN module has three connectors: Connector 1 is the Main connector, Connector 2 is the Auxiliary connector, and Connector 3 is the third WLAN connector. If the system has only two antenna cables, do not use the third WLAN connector. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. Do not insert the cables at an angle, this can cause damage to the the center pin of the antenna connector. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN module to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 4 Installation Guide English Installing the WLAN module software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN module. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software from http://www.hp.com/support. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the software from http://www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 5 English Removing a WLAN module CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 or 3 antenna cables from the WLAN module by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 6 Installation Guide English 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN module up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 7 English Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN module. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Click Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. For further product details, refer to the user guides on the computer by selecting Start > Help and Support > User Guides. User guides for select models may also be provided on a User Guides disc. 8 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your device. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplaines, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer . 2. In the left pane, select View System Information >

Hardware tab > Device Manager. Installation Guide 9 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 10 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Installation Guide 11 Regulatory Notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 12 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65-

to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Installation Guide 13 Regulatory Notices For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. 14 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Installation Guide 15 Regulatory Notices Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 16 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Korean notice Installation Guide 17 Regulatory Notices Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. 18 Installation Guide

 

 

EUT External Photos For the Hewlett Packard Company Optimator Model: HSTNN-W26C (KEDRON AGN, KEDRON AG, HOYAS, BEVO, and REDSTORM) DATE: 06/19/2007 Bluetooth Qualification Test Facility

(BQTF) IC recognized

#

3925 CETECOM Inc. 411 Dixon Landing Road Milpitas, CA 95035 U.S.A. Phone: + 1 (408) 586 6200 Fax: + 1 (408) 586 6299 E-mail: info@cetecomusa.com http://www.cetecom.com CETECOM Inc. is a Delaware Corporation with Corporation number: 2113686 Board of Directors: Dr. Harald Ansorge, Dr. Klaus Matkey, Hans Peter May Copyright by CETECOM Table of Content 1 2 ASSESSMENT.................................................................................................................................... 3 EUT EXTERNAL PHOTOS.............................................................................................................. 4 EUT TOP VIEW ............................................................................................................................. 4 EUT BOTTOM VIEW...................................................................................................................... 5 BATTERY AND BATTERY COMPARTMENT ..................................................................................... 6 EUT FRONT VIEW......................................................................................................................... 7 EUT BACK VIEW .......................................................................................................................... 8 EUT RIGHT SIDE VIEW.................................................................................................................. 9 EUT LEFT SIDE VIEW.................................................................................................................. 10 EUT USER VIEW ......................................................................................................................... 11 EUT USER VIEW WITH WWAN ANTENNA EXTENDED ................................................................ 12 EXTERNAL WWAN ANTENNA................................................................................................... 13 EUT USER VIEW TABLET ......................................................................................................... 14 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 1 Assessment The following is in compliance with the applicable criteria specified in FCC rules Parts 2, 15 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations and in compliance with the applicable criteria specified in Industry Canada rules RSS210. Company Description Model #

Hewlett Packard Notebook PC HSTNN-W26C Date:2007-6-15 Name: Peter Mu Title: Project Engineer Company: Cetecom Inc. Address: 411 Dixon Landing Rd, Milpitas, CA 95035, USA Phone: +1 408 586 6221 Email: peter.mu@cetecomusa.com 2 EUT External Photos 2.1 EUT top view 2.2 EUT bottom view 2.3 Battery and battery compartment 2.4 EUT front view 2.5 EUT back view 2.6 EUT right side view 2.7 EUT left side view 2.8 EUT user view 2.9 EUT user view with WWAN antenna extended 2.10 External WWAN Antenna 2.11 EUT user view tablet

 

 

Battery Cavity, location of labels. HP Confidential HP Confidential HP Confidential Wireless label, behind door HP Confidential HP Confidential Bottom with access panel removed. Antenna cables miniPCI slots WLAN HP Confidential HP Confidential HP Confidential Antenna cables

(Under keyboard routed into display hinge.) HP Confidential Bluetooth Module HP Confidential Bluetooth Cable HP Confidential SIM Card HP Confidential Modem Label HP Confidential WLAN Antennas HP Confidential WLAN left Antenna HP Confidential WLAN right Antenna HP Confidential WWAN right Antenna WLAN right Antenna HP Confidential HP Confidential